Foreword - s3. · PDF fileWhen it comes to service, ... Gas station information Fuel type:...

i

ForewordWelcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering andquality construction of each vehicle we build.This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupantsfollow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. Forimportant information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your completesatisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:U.S. OWNERS: � When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:

Toyota Customer Experience Center Toll−free:1−800−331−4331� Hawaii:

Servco Automotive Customer Services Toll−free:1−888−272−5515CANADIAN OWNERS: � When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:

Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll−free:1−888−TOYOTA−8 or 1−888−869−6828Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy ofcontinual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you mayfind some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.Please access our websites for further information.� The U.S. mainland www.toyota.com� Hawaii www.toyotahawaii.com� Canada www.toyota.ca

2006 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATIONAll rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of ToyotaMotor Corporation.

Publication No. OM41418UPart No. 01999-41418Printed in Japan 01−0608−00

( U)

Quick index

� If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 145. . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle will not start 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your engine stalls while driving 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle overheats 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If you have a flat tire 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle needs to be towed 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Tips for driving during break−in period 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� How to start the engine 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� General maintenance 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Complete index NO TAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) orhigher. For improved vehicle performance, use premium unleaded gasolinewith an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher.

See page 266 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity: 70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 Imp. gal.)

Engine oil: ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.

See page 357 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 361 through 369.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 386.

aU−3

Z

ii

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully toavoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they areused in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may causeinjury to people if the warning is ignored. You areinformed about what you must or must not do inorder to reduce the risk of injury to yourself andothers.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may causedamage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warningis ignored. You are informed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk ofdamage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbolshown above, it means: “Do not...”;“Do not do this”; or “Do not let thishappen”.

iii

Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time toread Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. Interms of helping you understand how you can receive themaximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems thisvehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual isthe most important Section for you and your family toread.

Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concern-ing seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint sys-tems of this vehicle and some potential hazards youshould be aware of. These systems work together alongwith the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provideoccupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect ofeach system is enhanced when it is used properly andtogether with other systems. No single occupant restraintsystem can, by itself, provide you or your family with theequal level of restraint which these systems can providewhen used together. That is why it is important for you andyour family to understand the purpose and proper use ofeach of these systems and how they relate to each other.

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to helpreduce the possibility of death or serious injury in theevent of a collision. None of these systems, either individ-ually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in theevent of collision. However, the more you know aboutthese systems and how to use them properly, the greateryour chances become of surviving an accident withoutdeath or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants ofthe vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wearseat belts properly at all times. Children should always besecured in child restraint systems that are appropriate fortheir age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutesfor them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducingthe risk of head, chest and knee injuries by preventingcontact of the head, chest and knee with interior portionsof the vehicle.

iv

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy withtremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS air-bags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sourcesof death or serious injury if an occupant is too close to anairbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body hasbeen placed between the occupant and the airbag at thetime of deployment. This is just one example of how theinstructions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will helpensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, andincrease the safety they can provide to you and your fami-ly in the event of an accident.

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your timeof ownership of this vehicle.

Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control cer-tain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist indriving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Be-sides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is asystem to record data in a crash or a near car crashevent. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In acrash or a near car crash event, this device may recordsome or all of the following information:

� Engine speed

� Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

� Vehicle speed

� To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

� Position of the transmission selector lever

� Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seatbelts or not

� Driver’s seat position

� Front passenger’s occupant classification

� SRS airbag deployment data

v

� SRS airbag system diagnostic data

If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control(VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may con-tain another EDR. There are a variety of driving situationswhich include activating the VSC under which the VSCEDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR mayrecord some or all of the following information:

� Behavior of the vehicle

� Steering wheel angle

� Vehicle speed

� To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

� To what extent the brake pedal was applied

� To what extent the ECU controlled the condition ofthe 4 wheels

� Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for thepurpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlikegeneral data recorders, the EDR does not record sounddata such as conversation between passengers.

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to athird party except when:

� An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

� Officially requested by the police or other authorities

� Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

� Ordered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:

� Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safetyperformance

� Disclose the data to a third party for research pur-poses without disclosing details of the vehicle owner,and only when it is deemed necessary

� Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-cation information to a non−Toyota organization forresearch purposes

vi

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limitedwarranties:

� New vehicle warranty

� Emission control systems warranty

� Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

Your responsibility formaintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the speci-fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details ofthese maintenance requirements. Also included in Section6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in-formation, please refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Important health and safetyinformation about your Toyota

CAUTION

� WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-nents contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de-fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as wellas waste produced by component wear contain oremit chemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-tive harm.

� Battery posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash yourhands after handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skin by washingthoroughly with soap and water.

vii

Accessories, spare parts andmodification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessoriesfor Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, orreplacement, or for any damage they may cause to, oradverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuineToyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyotaproducts could affect its performance, safety or durability,and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-tion, damage or performance problems resulting from themodification may not be covered under warranty.

Spark ignition system of yourToyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-ments of the Canadian Interference−Causing EquipmentStandard.

Installation of a mobile two−wayradio system

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system inyour vehicle could affect electronic systems such as multi-port fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, electronic throttle control system, cruise controlsystem, dynamic laser cruise control system, anti−lockbrake system, traction control system, vehicle stability con-trol system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensionersystem, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for pre-cautionary measures or special instructions regardinginstallation.

viii

Smart key system

Users of any electrical medical devices such as im-planted pacemakers should consult the manufacturer ofthe device for information about its operation under theinfluence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unex-pected effects on the operation of such medical devices.For details, see “Keys” on page 14 and “Smart keysystem” on page 27 in Section 1−2.

Tires and loading on yourToyota

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and ex-cess load may result in the deterioration of steer-ing ability and braking ability, leading to an acci-dent. Check the tire inflation pressure periodicallyand be sure to stay with the load limits given inthis Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflationpressure and load limits, see pages 289 and 361.

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in yourToyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle isscrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as theyare, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure tohave the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-sioner removed and disposed of by the qualified serviceshop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of yourvehicle.

Leak detection pump

This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. Thischeck is done approximately five hours after the engine isturned off. So you may hear sound coming from under-neath the luggage compartment for several minutes. Itdoes not indicate a malfunction.

You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in toprunning order is to maintain it properly fromthe moment you drive it off the showroomfloor.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual ispacked with literally everything you need toknow to perform your own maintenance invirtually every area of your new vehicle.

Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for AVALON may be pur-

chased from any Toyota dealer or the Material

Distribution Center. To purchase the repair

manual, please contact your Toyota dealer or callthe Material Distribution Center toll−free at

1−800−622−2033.

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to pre-vent small problems from growing into larger ones lat-er on. The repair manual outlines exactly what main-tenance is required and clearly explains how to do thework yourself step−by−step.

Areas covered include such things as spark plug re-placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oiland filter replacement.

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU � PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

� Comfortable

� Easy to use

� Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

U

’06 AVALON_U (OM41418U)

1

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOverview of instruments and controlsInstrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center cluster overview 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 1

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

2

1. Side vents

2. Side defroster outlets

3. Instrument cluster

4. Center cluster

5. Garage door opener switches

6. Auxiliary boxes

7. Front personal lights, interior lightand/or electric moon roof switches

8. Center vents

9. Glove box

10. Power door lock switches

11. Power window switches

12. Trunk opener main switch

13. Rear console box

14. Rear vents

15. Power outlets

16. Seat ventilator/heater switches

17. Cup holder

18. Automatic transmission selector lever

19. Tire pressure warning reset switch(On bottom of the instrument panel)

20. Hood lock release lever

21. Parking brake pedal

22. Window lock switch

23. Driving position memory switches

Instrument panel overview�View A


3

1. Instrument panel light control knob

2. Headlight, turn signal and front foglight switches

3. Audio remote control switches

4. Speech command switch (See theseparate “Navigation System Owner’sManual.”)

5. Climate remote control switches

6. Wiper and washer switches

7. Rear window and outside rear viewmirror defogger switch

8. Emergency flasher switch

9. Audio system

10. Air conditioning controls

11. Cigarette lighter and ashtray, auxiliarybox, cassette player or navigationsystem controller (For the navigationsystem, see the separate “NavigationSystem Owner’s Manual.”)

12. Ignition switch

13. Cruise control switch

14. Tilt steering lock release lever

15. Telescopic steering lock release lever

�View B (with key cylinder−type ignition switch)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

4

16. Glass breakage sensor

17. Trunk opener switch

18. Fuel filler door opener switch

19. Power rear view mirror control switches


5

1. Instrument panel light control knob

2. Headlight, turn signal and front foglight switches

3. Audio remote control switches

4. Speech command switch (See theseparate “Navigation System Owner’sManual.”)

5. Climate remote control switches

6. Wiper and washer switches

7. Rear window and outside rear viewmirror defogger switch

8. Emergency flasher switch

9. Audio system

10. Air conditioning controls

11. Cigarette lighter and ashtray, auxiliarybox, cassette player or navigationsystem controller (For the navigationsystem, see the separate “NavigationSystem Owner’s Manual.”)

12. Ignition switch (engine switch)


14. Distance switch

15. Tilt steering lock release lever

�View B (with smart key system)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

6

16. Telescopic steering lock release lever

17. Glass breakage sensor

18. Rear electric sunshade switch


20. Fuel filler door opener switch

21. Power rear view mirror control switches


7

1. Engine coolant temperature gauge

2. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

3. Tachometer

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Low fuel level warning light

7. Trip meter reset knob

8. Odometer and two trip meters

9. Automatic transmission shift rangeposition display

10. Dynamic laser cruise control display

11. Dynamic laser cruise control masterwarning light

Instrument cluster overview

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

8

1. Clock

2. Center display∗1

3. Front passenger’s seat belt reminderlight∗2

4. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights

5. Pattern selector knob (for centerdisplay)

∗1: If your vehicle is equipped with navigation system, see the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.∗2: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 145 in Section 1−6.

Center cluster overview


9

Brake system warning light∗1

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Charging system warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

or

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1or

Open door warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warninglight∗1

Vehicle stability control system and tractioncontrol system warning light∗1

or

Automatic headlight leveling system warninglight∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1

Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent systemindicator light

Smart key system warning light∗1

Low tire pressure warning light∗1

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

10

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 145 in Section 1−6.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 176 inSection 1−7.

∗3: If this light flashes, see “Dynamic laser cruise control” onpage 179 in Section 1−7.

Turn signal indicator lights

Slip indicator/traction control system off light

Cruise control indicator light∗2 or dynamic lasercruise control indicator light∗3

Automatic transmission indicator lights

Headlight high beam indicator light

Tail light indicator light

Dynamic laser cruise control ready modeindicator light

Conventional cruise control mode indicator light

Headlight indicator light


11

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSKeys and DoorsKeys 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobilizer system 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless remote control 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smart key system 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk lid 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft deterrent system 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric moon roof 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 2

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

12

Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.

1. Master keys (black)—These keys workin every lock. Your Toyota dealer willneed one of them to make a new keywith a built−in transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)—This key will not workin the locks of the glove box and thedoor located behind the rear seat arm-rest.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizersystem has been placed in the head ofthe master and sub keys. These chips areneeded to enable the system to functioncorrectly, so be careful not to lose thesekeys. If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the systemor start the engine.

To protect items locked in the trunk orglove box when using valet parking, leavethe sub key with the attendant.

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-ponder chip, observe the followingprecautions:

� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with a key ring restingon the key grip and do not pressthe key ring against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts.

Keys (with key cylinder−typeignition switch)


13

� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with other transponderkeys around (including keys of oth-er vehicles) and do not press otherkey plates against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts. Ifthis happens, remove the key onceand then insert it again after remov-ing other transponder keys (includ-ing keys of other vehicles) from thering or while gripping or coveringthem with your hand to start theengine.

� Do not bend the key grip.

� Do not cover the key grip with anymaterial that cuts off electromagnet-ic waves.

� Do not knock the key hard againstother objects.

� Do not leave the key exposed tohigh temperatures for a long period,such as on the dashboard and hoodunder direct sunlight.

� Do not put the key in water orwash it in an ultrasonic washer.

� Do not use the key with electromag-netic materials.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

14

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

The key consists of an electronic keyand a mechanical key. The mechanicalkey is for emergency use. If the elec-tronic key does not operate, you canopen the driver’s door using the me-chanical key.

1. Electronic keys—These keys can lockor unlock all the doors and can openthe trunk by using the wireless remotecontrol function or entry function of thesmart key system.

2. Mechanical keys—These keys can lockor unlock the driver’s door, the glovebox and the door located behind therear seat armrest.

Spare keys should not be left in thecabin. In the event that a spare key isleft in the cabin, the smart key systemwill remain actuated even after thedoors have been locked. Under thesecircumstances, the trunk can be openedeven after the driver has exited andlocked the vehicle, increasing the dan-ger of theft. (Refer to “OPENINGTRUNK WITH SMART KEY SYSTEM” onpage 45 in this Section.)

To protect items locked in the trunk or theglove box when using valet parking, lockthe trunk opener switch and leave theelectronic key with the attendant. Keep themechanical key with you. For details aboutlocking the trunk opener switch, see“—Luggage security system” on page 46in this Section.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizersystem has been placed in the electronickeys. These chips are needed to enablethe system to function correctly, so becareful not to lose these keys.

Keys (with smart key system)


15

CAUTION

� People with implanted pacemakersor cardiac defibrillators s hould keepaway from the smart key systemantennas, because the radio wavesmay affect the operation of suchdevices. For the antenna locationssee “ANTENNA LOCATION” on page29 in this Section.

� Users of any electrical medical de-vice other than implanted pacemak-ers and implanted cardiac defibrilla-tors should consult the manufactur-er of the device for informationabout its operation under the influ-ence of radio waves. Radio wavescould have unexpected effects onthe operation of such medical de-vices.

� If necessary, the entry function canbe disabled. See “DISABLING THESMART KEY SYSTEM” on page 33in this Section.

NOTICE

When using a electronic key contain-ing a transponder chip, observe thefollowing precautions:

� Do not affix any material that cutsoff electromagnetic waves (such asa metal seal) on the electronic key.

� Do not knock the electronic keyhard against other objects.

� Do not leave the electronic key ex-posed to high temperatures for along period, such as on the dash-board or hood under direct sun-light.

� Do not put the electronic key inwater or wash it in an ultrasonicwasher.

� Do not keep the electronic key to-gether with the products emittingelectromagnetic waves such as acellular phone.

USING A MECHANICAL KEY

When you use the mechanical key pushthe release button and take out the me-chanical key as shown. Be sure to put themechanical key back when not it use.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

16

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

The engine immobilizer system is atheft prevention system using an elec-tronic code. The transponder chip inthe key has an electronic code andtransmits the code to the vehicle. Onlywhen the electronic code in the chipcorresponds to the register ID code forthe vehicle, the engine immobilizer sys-tem will be canceled and the enginewill start.

The engine immobilizer system is automat-ically set when:

Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignitionswitch—The key is removed from the igni-tion switch.

Vehicles with smart key system—The igni-tion switch is turned off.

The indicator light will start flashing toshow that the system is set.

Engine immobilizer system


17

If any of the following indicator conditionsoccur, contact your Toyota dealer.

� The indicator light remains on.

� The indicator light does not start flash-ing under the following situations.

Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignitionswitch—When the key is removed fromthe ignition switch.

Vehicles with smart key system—Whenthe ignition switch is turned off.

� The indicator light flashes inconsistent-ly.

The engine immobilizer system is automat-ically canceled when:

Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignitionswitch—You insert the key to the ignition switch.

Vehicles with smart key system—You enter the vehicle carrying a key withsmart key system and press the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch (engine switch).

Even if the key battery is discharged, theengine can be started. See “Smart keysystem” on page 27 in this Section.

When the system is canceled, the indica-tor light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you anew key with built−in transponder chip,your dealer will need your key numberand master key (vehicles with key cylin-der−type ignition switch) or electronic key(vehicles with smart key system). Howev-er, there is a limit to the number of addi-tional keys your Toyota dealer can makefor you.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-semble the engine immobilizer sys-tem. If any unauthorized changes ormodifications are made, proper opera-tion of the system cannot be guaran-teed.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZRI−21BTY

FCC ID: NI4TMIMB−1

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

18

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignitionswitch

Vehicles with smart key system

1. Lock switch

2. Unlock switch

3. Alarm switch


5. Indicator light (vehicles with smart keysystem only)

Wireless remote control—


19

The wireless remote control function isdesigned to lock or unlock all thedoors, open the trunk lid, or activatethe alarm from a distance withinapproximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

When you operate any switch, push itslowly and securely.

Vehicles with smart key system only—When the switch is operated, the indicatorlight flashes once. If not, the battery maybe discharged. Replace the battery at theearliest opportunity.

The wireless remote control transmitter isan electronic component. Observe the fol-lowing instructions in order not to causedamage the key.

� Do not leave the transmitter in placeswhere the temperature becomes highsuch as on the dashboard.

� Do not disassemble it.

� Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

� Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-trol transmitters (for vehicles with key cyl-inder−type ignition switch) or 7 wirelessremote control transmitters (for vehicleswith smart key system) for the same ve-hicle. Contact your Toyota dealer for de-tailed information.

If the wireless remote control transmitterdoes not actuate the doors, or does notoperate from a normal distance, or if theindicator on the transmitter is dimmed ordoes not come on:

� Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the transmitter.

� The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the transmitter. Toreplace the battery, see “—Replacingbattery” on pages 24 or 25 in this Sec-tion.

If you lose your transmitter, contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toavoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-mote control transmitter” on page 332 inSection 4.)




’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

20

NOTICE:This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, there isno guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is en-couraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:

� Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

� Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

� Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

� Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.


Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

Locking operation (vehicles with key cyl-inder−type ignition switch)

Unlocking operation (vehicles with keycylinder−type ignition switch)

—Locking and unlockingdoors


21

Locking operation (vehicles with smartkey system)

Unlocking operation (vehicles with smartkey system)

To lock or unlock all the doors, pushthe switches slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the lock switch. All thedoors are locked simultaneously. At thistime one beep will sound and turn signallights flash once.

Vehicles with smart key system—For 3seconds after the doors have been locked,the doors cannot be re−unlocked via thesmart key system.

Check to see that the doors are securelylocked.

If any of the doors is not securely closed,or if the key is in the ignition switch (ve-hicles with key cylinder−type ignitionswitch) or key left in the vehicle (vehicleswith smart key system), locking cannot beperformed by the lock switch and a beepwill sound continuously for 10 seconds.

To stop the beep, take out the key fromthe vehicle or push the unlock switch.

To unlock: Push the unlock switch once tounlock the driver’s door alone. Pushingthe switch twice within 3 seconds unlocksall the doors simultaneously. Each timethe unlock switch is pushed, two beepswill sound and turn signal lights flashtwice.

This double switch operation to unlock alldoors can be changed to a single switchoperation. For details, contact your Toyotadealer.

If the key is in the ignition (vehicles withkey cylinder−type ignition switch) or theignition switch is set to ACC or ON (ve-hicles with smart key system), the vehiclecannot be unlocked via the unlock switch.

When all the doors are unlocked simulta-neously with a key, wireless remote con-trol or entry function of the smart keysystem, the following lights come on forabout 15 seconds and then fade out, evenif the door is not opened.

Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignitionswitch—Ignition switch light, interior light,front personal lights and rear personallightsVehicles with smart key system—Interiorlight, front personal lights, rear personallights and exterior foot lights

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

22

(For further information, see “Illuminatedentry system” on page 135 in Section1−5.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all thedoors will be automatically locked again.

If the wireless remote control is used tolock the doors near the window or doorhandle, there is a possibility that the doormay not unlocked by entry function ofsmart key system. Under these circum-stances, use the wireless remote controlto unlock the doors.

The time before automatic door lock func-tion can be changed. For details, contactyour Toyota dealer.

If the lock or unlock switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the switchand then push again.

The following adjustments can be made inthis system. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

� Cancelling the wireless door locking orunlocking function

� Cancelling the flash of the turn signallights

� Cancelling the beep sound



—Opening trunk lid


23

To open the trunk lid, push the trunkopener switch of the transmitter for 1second. A long beep will sound.

If the key is in the ignition (vehicles withkey cylinder−type ignition switch) or theignition switch is set at ACC or ON (ve-hicles with smart key system), the trunklid cannot be opened by the trunk openerswitch.

Opening of the trunk lid with the wirelessremote control can be changed as follows.Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

� Trunk lid opens by pushing the trunkopener switch twice in succession.

� Trunk lid opens by pushing the trunkopener switch once regardless of howlong the switch is being pressed.

� Opening of the trunk lid is disabledusing the wireless remote control trans-mitter.



Pushing the alarm switch for 1 secondblows the horn intermittently andflashes the headlights, turn signallights, tail lights and interior light.

Vehicles with smart key systemonly—When pushing the switch, the indi-cator light flashes.

The alarm switch is used to deter vehicletheft when you witness anyone attemptingto break into or damage your vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stopthe alarm midway, push the switch onceagain, unlock a door with the transmitter,or set the ignition switch to ON.

If the key is in the ignition (vehicles withkey cylinder−type ignition switch) or theignition switch is set at ACC or ON (ve-hicles with smart key system), the alarmdoes not work.

This alarm function can be disabled. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

—Activating alarm

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

24

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithiumbattery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed transmitter battery orcomponents.

NOTICE

� When replacing the transmitter bat-tery, be careful not to lose the com-ponents.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow-ing these procedures:

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open thetransmitter case.

2. Remove the circuit board, then removethe discharged transmitter battery.

NOTICE

� Take care not to damage the circuitboard.

� Do not bend the terminals.

—Replacing battery (with key cylinder−typeignition switch)


25

3. Put in a new transmitter battery withpositive (+) side up. Install the circuitboard into the transmitter case.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

� Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the transmitter bat-tery are faced correctly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside the transmitter, or itmay interfere with proper operation.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodewhen inserting the transmitter bat-tery and that dust or oils do notadhere to the transmitter case.

� Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thetransmitter operates properly. If the trans-mitter still does not operate properly, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

The transmitter can easily be damagedwhen replacing the battery. We recom-mend having the battery replaced by yourToyota dealer. If you have to do it your-self, use a CR1632 lithium battery orequivalent and a flathead screwdriver.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed transmitter battery orcomponents.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to touch the circuit,as this may generate static electric-ity that can damage the transmitter.

� When replacing the transmitter bat-tery, be careful not to lose the com-ponents.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow-ing these procedures:

—Replacing battery (with smart key system)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

26

1. Push the release button and take outthe mechanical key.

2. Using a flathead screwdriver or equiva-lent, open the transmitter case.

3. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-tery by flathead screwdriver or equiva-lent. Insert the guide groove and lift asshown in the above illustration.

NOTICE

Do not modify the battery case. Itmay cause a trouble.


27

4. Put in a new battery with the positive(+) side up. Install the cover and insertthe mechanical key into the transmitter.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

� Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the battery arefaced correctly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside the transmitter, or itmay interfere with proper operation.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodewhen inserting the transmitter bat-tery and that dust or oils do notadhere to the case.

� Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thetransmitter operates properly. If the trans-mitter still does not operate properly, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

The smart key system consists mainlyof the following functions.

� Engine immobilizer function (For de-tails, see “Engine immobilizer system”on page 16 in this Section.)

� Wireless remote control function (Fordetails, see “Wireless remote control”on page 18 in this Section.)

� Push button start function (For details,see “How to start the engine” on page296 in Section 3.)

� Entry function and start function (See“ENTRY FUNCTION AND STARTFUNCTION” described below.)

� Steering lock function (See “STEERINGLOCK FUNCTION” described below.)

Smart key system

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

28

CAUTION

� People with implanted pacemakersor cardiac defibrillators s hould keepaway from the smart key systemantennas, because the radio wavesmay affect the operation of suchdevices. For the antenna locationssee “ANTENNA LOCATION” on page29 in this Section.

� Users of any electrical medical de-vice other than implanted pacemak-ers and implanted cardiac defibrilla-tors should consult the manufactur-er of the device for informationabout its operation under the influ-ence of radio waves. Radio wavescould have unexpected effects onthe operation of such medical de-vices.

� If necessary, the entry function canbe disabled. See “DISABLING THESMART KEY SYSTEM” on page 33in this Section.

Entry function

Start function

ENTRY FUNCTION AND STARTFUNCTION

By carrying the key, you can lock andunlock the doors and start the engine.

Entry function— You can lock and unlockthe doors and open the trunk without in-serting the key in the keyhole. For furtherinformation, see “Side doors” on page 34and “Trunk lid” on page 44 in this Section.

Start function— You can shift the powersupply mode and start the engine whenthe electronic key is in the vehicle. Forfurther information, see “Ignition switch”on page 159 in Section 1−7 and “How tostart the engine ”on page 296 in Section3.


29

STEERING LOCK FUNCTION

When the driver’s door is opened afterturning off the engine, the steering wheelwill lock.

The steering lock is automatically un-locked when the “ENGINE START STOP”switch (engine switch) is pressed. If theindicator light on the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch flashes green, this indicatesthat the steering wheel remains locked. Ifthe amber indicator light flashes, this indi-cates that the steering lock is malfunction-ing. For details, see “How to start theengine” on page 296 and “Driving andparking using smart key system” on page300 in Section 3.

ANTENNA LOCATION

1. Antenna inside cabin and trunk

2. Antenna outside cabin and trunk

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

30

ACTUATION AREA

The entry function and start functionare available to use when a registeredkey is in the actuation area.

1. Entry function actuation area— About1 m (3 ft.) from each outside doorhandle and trunk opener switch.

If the key is close to a door handle,a window, the center of the rear bump-er, on the ground or above the roof,the entry function may not operateproperly.

2. Start function actuation area— Insideof the cabin.

The start function may not be activatedif the key is on the instrument panel,on the package tray, in the glove boxor on the floor, etc.

In the following cases, the smart key sys-tem may not operate properly.

� When facilities issuing strong electro-magnetic waves such as TV towers,electric power stations, broad castingstations are nearby.

� In places where automated payment fa-cilities are installed (such as gas sta-tions).

� When you are carrying an electronickey together with a mobile communica-tions system such as a two−way radioor cellular phone.

� When the electronic key is in contactwith or covered by a metallic object.

� When another person is operating awireless remote control function onanother vehicle near your vehicle.

� When the battery is discharged. To re-place the battery, see “—Replacing bat-tery” on page 25 in this Section.

� When the electronic key is near ahigh−voltage or noise−emitting device.

� When you are carrying an electronickey together with a key for anothersmart key system equipped vehicle oranother instrument emitting radiowaves.

� Depending on the position of the keyor vehicle body shape the key may notwork well even within the actuationarea.

� When the key surface is covered by asticker, etc. that may cut off electro-magnetic wave.

If the smart key system does not oper-ate properly and you cannot enter, youcan lock and unlock all the doors byusing mechanical key attached to themaster key or wireless remote controlfunction.


31

STARTING THE ENGINE WHEN THEELECTRONIC KEY BATTERY ISDISCHARGED

If the key indicator does not flash andthe engine cannot be started by usingthe start function, the battery may bedischarged. Replace the key battery assoon as possible. (See “—Replacingbattery” on page 25 in this Section.)

However the engine can be started in thefollowing procedures.

1. While the brake pedal is depressed,touch the Toyota logo side of theelectronic key to the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch.

2. Start the engine within 5 seconds afterthe green indicator light on the“ENGINE START STOP” switch comeson and a buzzer sounds.

BATTERY POWER SAVING

Both the vehicle and key transmitters arealways sending signals to each other. Toprevent the batteries from being dis-charged, the smart key system is auto-matically deactivated in the following con-ditions:

� If the electronic key is left outside ofthe vehicle and within the effectiverange of the entry function actuationarea for more than 10 minutes.

� If the door lock or unlock operation isnot performed more than 2 weeks.

The key and the vehicle are communicat-ing even while the vehicle is not beingdriven. Do not leave the key near thevehicle (within 2 m [7 ft.]).

The vehicle battery may drain if thevehicle is not used for a long period oftime. To prevent battery drain, disconnectthe battery negative (−) terminal or disablethe smart key system. (For details aboutdisable the smart key system, see“DISABLING THE SMART KEY SYSTEM”on page 33 in this Section.)

If the battery is disconnected, the powerwindow and moon roof may not operateautomatically and the jam protection func-tion will not function correctly after youreconnect. In this case, you shouldnormalize each system. To normalizethem, see “Power windows” on page 41and “Electric moon roof” on page 52 inSection 1−2.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

32

To reactivate the smart key system, per-form any of the following:

(a) Press the lock button on the outsidefront door handle while carrying theelectronic key.

(b) Perform a wireless remote control op-eration.

(c) Insert and turn the mechanical key inthe keyhole of the driver’s door.

If the electronic key receives strong elec-tromagnetic waves over a period of time,the battery can be drastically run down.You should always keep the at least 1 m(3 ft.) away from the electronic key follow-ing electrical appliances.

� TV

� Personal computer

� Cellular phone

� Cordless phone recharger unit

� Electric light stand

� Fluorescent desk light


FCC ID: NI4TMLF−1



CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.


This device complies with RSS−210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.





33


� Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

� Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

� Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

� Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.



Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

DISABLING THE SMART KEY SYSTEM

The following functions can be disabled:

� A function that allows you to lock/un-lock the doors and open the trunk bysimply carrying a key

� A function that causes the vehicle tobeep if keys are forgotten inside thevehicle or trunk and a door is closed

� A function that recalls the position ofthe driver’s seat and outside rear viewmirrors

� A function that shifts the power supplymode and starts the engine when theelectronic key is in the vehicle.

� Warning lights and buzzers

For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the smart key system does not oper-ate properly because of a system mal-function, consult your Toyota dealer.Make sure to bring all of the keys. Theymay be necessary to repair the system.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

34



Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key forward.To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the doors lock and unlock simulta-neously with the driver’s door. In the driv-er’s door lock, turning the key once willunlock the driver’s door and twice in suc-cession will unlock all the doors simulta-neously.

This double key turning operation to un-lock all the doors can be changed to asingle key turning operation. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

Vehicles with smart key system—For 3seconds after the doors have been locked,the doors cannot be re−unlocked via thesmart key system.

When you unlock the doors, the illumi-nated entry system will be activated. (Forfurther information, see “Illuminated entrysystem” on page 135 in Section 1−5.)

When you carry the registered key withsmart key system into the actuation area,you can lock and unlock the side doorswithout using the key. For further informa-tion of actuation area, see “Smart keysystem” on page 27 in this Section.

Side doors——Locking and unlocking withkey

—Locking and unlocking withsmart key system


35

Locking operation

Push the lock button on the outsidedoor handle slowly and firmly. All thedoors lock simultaneously. At this timeone beep will be heard and turn signallights flash once.

In the following cases, you cannot belocked by pushing the lock button and abeep will sound as an indicator.

� When any of the doors is not securelyclosed. A beep will sound continuouslyfor 10 seconds.

� When the lock switch is pressed whileopening or closing the door. A beepwill sound continuously for 10 seconds.

� When the engine is not turned off. Abeep will sound continuously for 2 sec-onds.

� When the key is left in the vehicle. Abeep will sound continuously for 2 sec-onds.

� When attempting to lock the doors withthe key near a window or a door han-dle. A beep will sound continuously for2 seconds.

The beep may not sound if the key is onthe instrument panel, on the package tray,in the glove box or on the floor, etc.

Unlocking operation

Grasp the outside door handle (sensorsare located on the underside of thedoor handles). Only the driver’s doorunlocks when the driver’s door handleis grasped. All the doors unlock whenany door handle other than the driver’sdoor handle is grasped. At this timetwo beeps will be heard and the turnsignal lights flash twice.

The doors may not unlock if the handleis grasped too quickly. Be sure to confirmthat the doors are unlocked before pullingthe door handle. If the doors do not openwhen the handle is pulled, return the han-dle to its original position.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

36

Wearing gloves may slow response time.For 3 seconds after the doors have beenlocked, the doors cannot be re−unlockedvia the smart key system.

When you enter the entry function actua-tion area, the interior and exterior lightscome on for about 15 seconds. After thelights come on, all the side doors can beunlocked by grasping the outside doorhandle.

You have 30 seconds to open a door afterusing the unlocking function. If a door isnot opened by then, all the doors will beautomatically locked again.

The doors may unlock if the key is withinthe entry function actuation area and alarge amount of water splashes on thedoor handle (for example, in the rain orin a car wash).

When you unlock the doors, the illumi-nated entry system will be activated. (Forfurther information, see “Illuminated entrysystem” on page 135 in Section 1−5.)

SELECTING DOORS TO BE UNLOCKEDWITH ENTRY FUNCTION

The unlock operation has 2 modes. Tochange the mode, within 1 m (3 ft.) ofthe vehicle press the lock switch andthe alarm, the trunk opener or unlockswitch simultaneously for 5 seconds.

In order to change unlock modes, the igni-tion switch must be turned off.

Repeating this procedure allows you totoggle between the following 2 modes:

1. Driver’s door only (default)—In thismode, only the driver’s door unlockswhen the driver’s door handle isgrasped. All the doors unlock when anydoor handle other than the driver’sdoor handle is grasped. When the set-ting is complete, you will hear twobeeps.

2. All doors—In this mode, all doors (ex-cept the trunk) unlocks when any ofthe door handles is grasped. When thesetting is complete, you will hear twobeeps.

After the mode change operation is com-plete, wait 5 seconds before repeating theoperation.


37

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pullingthe inside handle even if the lock knobsare in the locked position.

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of thedoors while driving. The doors willopen and an accident may occur.Toyota strongly recommends that allchildren be placed in the rear seat ofthe vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in thelock position will also lock the door. Becareful not to lock your keys in the ve-hicle.

Doors cannot be locked when either frontdoor is open and the key is in the ignition(vehicles with key cylinder−type ignitionswitch) or key is left in the vehicle (ve-hicles with smart key system).

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

—Locking and unlocking withinside lock knob

—Locking and unlocking withpower door lock switch

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

38

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on thefront side. To unlock: Push the switch down on therear side.

All the doors lock or unlock simultaneous-ly.

When the front doors are locked from theoutside or locked with the wireless remotecontrol transmitter, the power door lockswitch will not work until either front dooris unlocked with the key, lock knob, orwireless remote control transmitter.

If the vehicle is subjected to a severefrontal, rear or side impact with the igni-tion switch set at ON, all doors will unlockautomatically after a few seconds.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING

You can select the following functions:

� Locking linked with the shift position

All doors are automatically locked whenthe selector lever is moved out of “P”position.

� Locking linked with vehicle speed

All doors are automatically locked whenthe vehicle speed goes above about 20km/h (12 mph).

You can set or cancel the automaticdoor locking functions:

Be sure to apply the parking brake whenperforming the following operations.

To select the locking linked with theshift position:

1. Close all doors and turn the ignitionswitch to ON.

2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-tion switch to ON, press and hold thedriver’s side power door lock switch inthe lock position for 5 seconds andthen release.

The doors will be locked and unlockedto indicate that the function is set.

To cancel the function, do the above op-eration again.

—Automatic door locking andunlocking functions


39

To select the locking linked with thevehicle speed:


2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the“N” position.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-tion switch to ON, press and hold thedriver’s side power door lock switch inthe lock position for 5 seconds andthen release.



AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING

You can select the following functions:

� Unlocking linked with the shift posi-tion

All doors are automatically unlockedwhen the selector lever is moved to“P” position.

� Unlocking linked with the ignitionswitch

All doors are automatically unlockedwhen the driver’s door is opened within10 seconds after the ignition switch isset from ON to ACC or OFF.

You can set or cancel the automaticdoor unlocking functions:

Be sure to apply the parking brake whenperforming the following operations.

To select the unlocking linked with theshift position:


2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-tion switch to ON, press and hold thedriver’s side power door lock switch inthe unlock position for 5 seconds andthen release.



’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

40

To select the unlocking linked with theignition switch:


2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the“N” position.

3. Within 10 seconds of turning the igni-tion switch to ON, press and hold thedriver’s side power door lock switch inthe unlock position for 5 seconds andthen release.



Move the lock knob to the “LOCK”position as shown on the label.

When the child−protector is locked, youcannot open the rear door by the insidedoor handle. We recommend using thisfeature whenever small children are in thevehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-vent the doors from being openedunintentionally.

—Rear door child−protectors


41

Window lock switch

Driver’s door switches

Front passenger’s door switch

The windows can be operated with theswitch on each door.

The power windows work when the ignitionswitch is set at ON.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, it works for 43 seconds even afterthe ignition switch is turned off. It stopsworking when either front door is opened.

OPERATING THE FRONT WINDOWS

Use the switches on the driver’s doorand front passenger’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passenger’s windowcannot be operated.

The indicator lights on the switch tell youwhich of the switches can be operated.

Driver’s door switches

Front passenger’s door switch

Power windows

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

42

Automatic operation: Push the switchcompletely down or pull it completely up,and then release it. The window will fullyopen or close. To stop the window part-way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-site direction and then release it.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the front passenger’swindow cannot be operated.

The indicator lights on the switch tell youwhich of the switches can be operated.

Jam protection function: If somethinggets caught between the window and win-dow frame, during automatic closing op-eration or key off closing operation, thewindow stops and opens half way.

If the window receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

If the power window does not operateautomatically or the jam protectionfunction does not operate correctly, youshould normalize the power window.

To normalize the power window:

1. Push down the power window switchesof each front door and lower the win-dows halfway.

2. Pull up the switches until the windowsclose and hold the switches for 1 sec-ond.

Make sure that the windows open andclose automatically. If the power windowscannot be operated properly, have itchecked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to activate the jam protectionfunction intentionally, as it could re-sult in a death or serious injury.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the window is fullyclosed.


43

OPERATING THE REAR WINDOWS

Use the switch on each rear doors orthe switches on the driver’s door thatcontrol rear passengers’ windows.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passengers’ windowscannot be operated.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personal in-jury, you must do the following.

� Before you close the power win-dows, always make sure there isnobody around the power windows.You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in death or serious in-jury. When anyone closes the powerwindows, make sure he or she op-erates the windows safely.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.

� Be sure to carry the key when youleave your vehicle.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

44

� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,with the key left in the vehicle.Otherwise, he/she could use thepower window switches and gettrapped in a window. Unattendedperson (particularly a small child)can be involved in a serious acci-dent.

To open the trunk lid from the driver’sseat, push the trunk opener switch.

See “Cargo and luggage” on page 290 inSection 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

To close the trunk lid, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the trunk lid, trypulling it up to make sure it is securelyclosed.

To deactivate this lock release switch fromopening the trunk lid, see “—Trunk openermain switch” described below.

The trunk lid can be opened with the wire-less remote control transmitter, see“—Opening trunk lid” on page 22 in thisSection.

CAUTION

Keep the trunk lid closed while driv-ing. This not only keeps the luggagefrom being thrown out but also pre-vents exhaust gases from enteringthe vehicle.

Trunk lid—


45

OPENING TRUNK WITH SMART KEYSYSTEM

When you carry the registered key intothe actuation area, the trunk can beopened. For further information of actua-tion area, see “Smart key system” onpage 27 in this Section.

A warning buzzer may sound when:

� The key is brought into the cabin afterthe trunk is opened, and the trunk isthen closed.

� The key is near the trunk when thetrunk is closed.

The buzzer may sound even when the keyis not in the trunk. This does not indicatea problem. However, under these circum-stances, the trunk cannot be opened usingthe smart key system. Open the trunkusing other methods.

If you left the key in the trunk and closeit when all side doors are locked, a beepwill sound continuously for 2 seconds. Youcan open the trunk pushing the trunkopener switch without carrying anotherkey. However, in some instances, thebeep may not sound when the trunk isclosed depending on the location of thekey in the trunk. In addition, when thedoors are open or unlocked, the beep maynot sound when the trunk is closed. Whenclosing the trunk, make sure that the keyis not left in it.

On Off

If you do not want to activate the trunklid opener system, turn off the trunkopener main switch in the glove box.To turn it on, push in the trunk openermain switch again.

—Trunk opener main switch

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

46

1. Pull down the rear armrest and openthe door behind it.

2. Pull the loop of wire to unlock thetrunk lid.

This is used in case the trunk lid cannotbe unlocked due to a discharged batteryor other trouble.

This system helps protect things lockedin the trunk by safeguarding the trunkopener main switch from unwanted ac-cess.

1. To cancel the trunk opener switch,turn off the trunk opener mainswitch in the glove box.

—In case the trunk opener isnot actuated —Luggage security system


47

2. After closing the glove box lid, in-sert the master key (vehicles withkey cylinder−type ignition switch) ormechanical key (vehicles with smartkey system) and turn it clockwise tosafeguard the lock release switch.

3. After closing the door located behindthe rear seat armrest, insert themaster key (vehicles with key cylin-der−type ignition switch) or mechani-cal key (vehicles with smart key sys-tem) and turn it clockwise to lockthe door.

After closing the trunk lid, try pulling it upto make sure it is securely locked.

If a person is locked in the trunk,he/she can pull down the phosphores-cent strap on the inside of trunk lid toopen the trunk lid.

The phosphorescent (glow−in−the−dark)strap will continue to glow for a time afterthe trunk lid is closed. Exposing the strapto stronger light will cause it to glow lon-ger.

—Internal trunk release strap

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

48

CAUTION

� Always lock the trunk lid and alldoors, and keep away the vehiclekeys out of children’s reach.

� Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle. Unsupervised childrenmay lock themselves in the vehicleor trunk and suffer serious injuriesor death.

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch l ever and lift thehood.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. Then lower the hood and make sureit locks into place. If necessary, pressdown gently on the front edge to lock it.

Hood


49

To deter vehicle theft, the system isdesigned to sound an alarm if any ofthe doors, trunk or hood is forcibly un-locked or the battery terminal is discon-nected and then reconnected when thevehicle is locked.

The alarm also sounds, when someoneattempts to break the side windows.

The alarm blows the horn intermittentlyand flashes the headlights, turn signallights, tail lights and interior light.

Indicator light

Glass breakage sensor

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignitionswitch—The key is removed from theignition switch.

Vehicles with smart key system—Theignition switch is turned off.

The engine immobilizer system is set andthe indicator light will start flashing. (Fordetails, see “Engine immobilizer system”on page 16 in this Section.)

2. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle.

3. Close and lock all the doors, trunk andhood.

The indicator light will remain on when allthe doors, trunk and hood are closed andlocked.

The theft deterrent system will automati-cally be set after 30 seconds. When thesystem is set, the indicator light will startflashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator lightstarts flashing, you may leave the ve-hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle whenyou set the system, because unlockingfrom the inside will activate the system.

Theft deterrent system

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

50

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm underthe following conditions:

� If any of the doors is unlocked or ifthe trunk or hood is forcibly openedwithout the key, wireless remote controlor entry function of the smart key sys-tem.

� If the battery terminal is disconnectedand then reconnected.

� If the ignition is hotwired.

Vehicles with the glass breakage sensor—

� The side windows are tapped or bro-ken.

The indicator light will come on when thesystem is activated.

All the doors will be automatically lockedagain when the following two conditionsare met:

� If any of the doors is unlocked withoutthe key, wireless remote control orentry function of the smart key system.

� If the key is not in the ignition switch(vehicles with key cylinder−type ignitionswitch) or the ignition switch is set tooff (vehicles with smart key system).

After one minute, the alarm will automati-cally stop and the indicator light will startflashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resetsthe alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under thesame circumstances described in“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the followingthree ways:

� Set the ignition switch to ON.

� Unlock any of the doors with the key,wireless remote control or entry func-tion of the smart key system.

� Open the trunk with the wireless re-mote control or entry function of thesmart key system.

CANCELLING THE SYSTEM

The system will be cancelled by theabove mentioned 3 ways.

If the tail lights come on for 2 seconds,the theft deterrent system has beenalarmed. Check to see if there is anyabnormality with your vehicle.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.The doors should be locked with thekey, wireless remote control or entryfunction of the smart key system. Besure to wait until the indicator lightstarts flashing.

3. Unlock any door from the inside. Thesystem should activate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the otherdoors, trunk and hood. When testingthe hood, also check that the systemis activated when the battery terminalis disconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.


51

This indicates that the fuel filler dooris on the left side of your vehicle.

1. To open the fuel filler door, push theopener switch.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames when refueling.The fumes are flammable.

� When opening the cap, do not re-move the cap quickly. In hot weath-er, fuel under pressure could causeinjury by spraying out of the fillerneck if the cap is suddenly re-moved.

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turnthe cap counterclockwise by 90 de-grees (to the pressure point 1), andthen turn it an additional 30 degrees(to point 2). Pause slightly beforeremoving it.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swooshwhen the cap is opened.

Fuel tank cap

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

52

3. The removed cap can be stored onthe back side of the fuel filler door.

Position the cap so that the hooks pointto the left and right, and set it in thereceptacle on the back side of the door.

When installing the cap, turn the capclockwise until you hear a click. Whenyou hear the click, the cap is fullyclosed.

If the cap is not installed securely, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION

� Make sure the cap is installed se-curely to prevent fuel sp illage inthe event of an accident.

� Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, applyforce only in the turning direction tothe cap. Do not pull or pry it.

Sliding operation

Tilting operation

Electric moon roof


53

To operate the moon roof, use theswitch between the personal lights.

The moon roof works when the ignitionswitch is set at ON.

The sunshade can be opened or closedby hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push and hold the switch for 1second on the “SLIDE OPEN” side.

The roof will open and stop partway 50mm (2.0 in.) from the fully opened posi-tion. When you push the “SLIDE OPEN”side again, the moon roof will open fully.To stop the roof partway, push the switchon either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side briefly.

As driving with the moon roof opened fullywill cause wind throbs, we recommendyou to drive with the moon roof partway50 mm (2.0 in.) from the fully openedposition.

The sunshade will be opened together withthe roof.

To close: Push and hold the switch for 1second on the “TILT UP” side.

The roof will fully close automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push the switch oneither the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side briefly.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push and hold the switch for1 second on the “TILT UP” side.

The roof will fully tilt up automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push the switch oneither the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side briefly.

To tilt down: Push and hold the switch for1 second on the “SLIDE OPEN” side.

The roof will fully tilt down automatically.To stop the roof partway, push the switchon either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”side briefly.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, the moon roof works for 43 sec-onds even after the ignition switch isturned off. It stops working when eitherdoor is opened.

Jam protection function: If somethinggets caught between the moon roof andframe during closing operation, the moonroof stops and opens half way.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

If the moon roof does not operate auto-matically or the jam protection functiondoes not operate correctly, you shouldnormalize the moon roof.

To normalize the moon roof, push andhold the switch on the “TILT UP” side untilthe moon roof tilts all the way up andthen tilts down a little automatically.

Make sure that the moon roof opens andcloses automatically. If the moon roof can-not be operated properly, have it checkedby your Toyota dealer.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

54

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personalinjury, you must do the following.

� While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the roof opening. Other-wise, they could be killed or seri-ously injured if the vehicle stopssuddenly or if the vehicle is in-volved in an accident.

� Before you close the moon roof,always make sure there is nobodyaround the moon roof. You mustalso make sure nobody places hisor her head, hands and other partsof the body in the roof opening. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in the closing roof, it couldresult in death or serious injury.When anyone closes the moon roof,first make sure it is safe to do so.

� Be sure to carry the key when youleave your vehicle.

� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,with the key left in the vehicle.Otherwise, he/she could use themoon roof switches and get trappedin the roof opening. Unattendedperson (particularly a small child)can be involved in a serious acci-dent.

� Never sit on top of the vehiclearound the roof opening.

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to activate the jam protectionfunction intentionally, as it could re-sult in a death or serious injury.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the moon roof is fullyclosed.


55

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOccupant restraint systemsSeats 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving position memory system 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk storage extension 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrest 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat ventilators/heaters 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS airbags 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 3

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

56

While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

� Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow any passengers to sit inthe luggage compartment or cargoarea. Persons not properly seatedand/or not properly restrained byseat belts can be k illed or s everelyinjured in the event of emergencybraking or a collision.

� During driving, do not allow anypassengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Otherwise,death or severe injuries can occurin the event of emergency brakingor a collision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys withconsiderable force, and can causedeath or serious injury especially ifthe driver is very close to the airbag.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbagis the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) ofinflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10in.) from your driver airbag providesyou with a clear margin of safety.This distance is measured from thecenter of the steering wheel to yourbreastbone. If you sit less than 250mm (10 in.) away now, you canchange your driving position in sever-al ways:

� Move your seat to the rear as faras you can while still reaching thepedals comfortably.

� Slightly recline the back of theseat. Although vehicle designs vary,many drivers can achieve the 250mm (10 in.) distance, even with thedriver seat all the way forward, sim-ply by reclining the back of theseat somewhat. If reclining the backof your seat makes it hard to seethe road, raise yourself by using afirm, non−slippery cushion, or raisethe seat if your vehicle has thatfeature.

� If your steering wheel is adjustable,tilt it downward. This points the air-bag toward your chest instead ofyour head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-ommended by NHTSA above, whilestill maintaining control of the footpedals, steering wheel, and your viewof the instrument panel controls.

SeatsFront seats——Front seat precautions


57

Front passenger seat

CAUTION

� The SRS front passenger airbagalso deploys with considerableforce, and can cause death or seri-ous injury especially if the frontpassenger is very close to the air-bag. The front passenger seatshould be as far from the airbag aspossible with the seatback adjusted,so the front passenger sits upright.

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

� Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the area where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such change may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system, orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving as the seat mayunexpectedly move and cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

� Be careful that the seat does nothit a passenger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seat position, re-lease the lever and try sliding theseat forward and backward to makesure it is locked in position.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushyour body back against the seat tomake sure the seat is locked inposition.

� Do not put objects under the seats.Otherwise, the objects may interferewith the seat−lock mechanism orunexpectedly push up the seat posi-tion adjusting lever and the seatmay suddenly move, causing thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

� While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. Otherwise, yourhands or fingers may be caught andinjured.

—Seat adjustment precautions

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

58

NOTICE

Do not operate the control switch inmore than one dimension at a time.It may cause electrical overload.

1. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor serious injury.

2. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

—Adjusting front seats(manual seat)


59

1. SEAT LEG SUPPORT ADJUSTINGSWITCH (some models on driver’sside)

Operating this switch raises the frontedge of the seat cushion.

Push the switch on either side.

Releasing the switch will stop the seatcushion at that position.

Do not place anything under the frontseats, as this might interfere with the seatmovement.

2. SEAT POSITION AND SEAT CUSHIONANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH (driver’sside only)

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat atthat position.

Do not place anything under the frontseats, as this might interfere with the seatmovement.

3. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat-back at that position.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor serious injury.

4. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORTADJUSTING SWITCH (driver’s sideonly)

Push the switch on either side.

The amount of lumbar support will changewhile the switch is pushed.

—Adjusting front seats (powerseat)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

60

This system can memorize the positionof the driver’s seat and outside rearview mirrors, and recall them at thetouch of a button.

Buttons “1” and “2” can memorize twoseparate positions.

SETTING THE DRIVING POSITION

The ignition switch must be set at ON andthe shift lever is in the “P” position.

1. Adjust the driver’s seat and outsiderear view mirrors to the desiredposition.

2. While pushing the “SET” button,push button “1” or “2” until a beepis heard.

The system can memorize up to 2 posi-tions by repeating the above steps. If step2 is performed when both buttons “1” and“2” are memorized, the previous positionwill be erased and a new position will beset.

To make only slight changes to an alreadymemorized position, the easiest way is tofirst activate the memorized position, thenmake the desired changes and performstep 2 above.

Driving position memorysystem—

—Memory call system usingmemory buttons


61

RECALLING THE MEMORIZED POSITION

When you push button “1” or “2”, abeep will sound and the driving posi-tion will be automatically adjusted tothe position recorded for that button.

The memorized position can be recalledunder the following conditions:

� The ignition switch is set at ON andthe shift lever is in the “P” positionwith the brake pedal released.

� The key is not in the ignition switch(vehicles with key cylinder−type ignitionswitch) or the ignition is turned off (ve-hicles with smart key system), andless than 30 seconds have passedsince opening the driver’s door.

To stop the operation, push any drivingposition memory button.

To reactivate the system, push the button“1” or “2” again.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,the memory will be erased and the memo-rized positions will have to be set again.

CAUTION

� Do not start the vehicle while theadjustments are being made.

� Take care not to select the wrongbutton, or the seat could strike therear passenger or hit your bodyagainst the steering wheel. If thishappens, you can stop the move-ment by pressing another drivingposition memory switch, or de-pressing the brake pedal.

When the driver’s door is opened, youcan recall the memorized position usingthe wireless remote control function orthe entry function of the smart key sys-tem.

This function can be used after setting thedriving position by following procedure.

—Memory call system usingthe electronic key (smart key system only)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

62

REGISTERING THE DRIVING POSITIONONTO THE ELECTRONIC KEY

An electronic key can memorize only onedriving position.

The driver’s door must be closed with theignition switch is turned off.

1. Push and hold the previously memo-rized driving position button “1” or“2”.

2. While depressing the button above−mentioned, push and hold the lockor unlock button on the electronickey until a beep sounds.

If you want to set other driving position,repeat the above procedure. The previoussetting will be erased and the new posi-tion will be set.

CANCELING THE DRIVING POSITION ONTO THE ELECTRONIC KEY

The driver’s door must be closed with theignition switch turned off.

1. Push and hold the “SET” switch.

2. Push and hold the lock or unlockbutton on the electronic key untiltwo beeps sound.

The memory on the key is disabled. Toenable it again, repeat the above proce-dure.


63

SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

CAUTION

� Adjustment should not be madewhile the vehicle is moving.

� When adjusting the seat, be carefulthat the seat does not hit a passen-ger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushback your body to make sure it islocked in position.

� When operating the seat, be carefulnot to get your hands or feetpinched in the seat.

Flap area

� Do not place objects on the flaparea. Objects placed behind the rearseat may fall into the gap behindthe seatback. If objects are left inthe gap, the reclining seatback willnot lock properly, leaving the seat-back free to move. When the ve-hicle is in operation, moving seat-backs may cause injury.

In the event that an object getscaught behind the rear seatback,contact your Toyota dealer.

Rear seats

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

64

1. Pull down the armrest in the rearseat.

2. Push down the handle and open thedoor.

If the door is locked, insert the key andturn it counterclockwise to unlock. Use themaster key (vehicles with the key cylin-der−type ignition switch) or mechanicalkey (vehicles with the smart key system).

Lock the door after use to protect itemsin the trunk.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 290in Section 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the door behind the arm-rest closed when not in use.

Trunk storage extension


65

Front

Rear

For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

� Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

� After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

� Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

Type A

Type B

Head restraints Armrest

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

66

To use the armrest, pull it down asshown above.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,avoid putting heavy loads on it.

With seat ventilator

Without seat ventilator

The front seat heater has two switches:one marked “L” (for driver’s seat) andthe other marked “R” (for front passen-ger’s seat).

To turn on the seat heater, push theknob to pop it out and turn the knobclockwise.

At this time, the indicator light will illumi-nate to indicate the seat heater is operat-ing.

The ignition switch must be set at ON tooperate seat heaters.

With seat ventilator: Three setting levelsare available.

To disable this function, turn the knob tothe center position. The indicator lightgoes off.

Without seat ventilator: To adjust tempera-ture, turn the knob.

To disable this function, turn the knob tothe leftmost position. The indicator lightgoes off.

Push the knob into the recessed positionwhen not in use.

Seat ventilators/heaters——Seat heater


67

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-erating the seat heater because itmay make them feel too hot or causeburns at low temperatures (erythema,varicella). Use extra caution for;

� Babies, small children, elderly per-sons, sick persons or persons withphysical disabilities

� Persons who have sensitive skin

� Persons who are exhausted

� Persons who have taken alcohol ordrugs which induce sleep (sleepingdrug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat from overheating,do not use the seat heater with ablanket, cushion, or other insulatingobjects which cover the seat.

NOTICE

� Do not put unevenly weighed ob-jects on the seat and do not sticksharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)into the seat.

� When cleaning the seats, do notuse organic substances (paint thin-ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,etc.). They may damage the seatventilation/heating system and seatsurface.

� Before cleaning the seats, fullywring out the towel that will beused. Water entering the seats maycause the seat ventilation/heatingsystem to malfunction.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, turn the switches offwhen the engine is not running.

The front seat ventilator has twoswitches: one marked “L” (for driver’sseat) and the other marked “R” (forfront passenger’s seat).

To turn on the seat ventilator, push theknob to pop it out and then turn theknob counterclockwise.

At this time, the indicator light will illumi-nate to indicate the seat ventilator is oper-ating.

The ignition switch must be set at ON tooperate seat ventilators.

Three setting levels are available.

To disable this function, turn the knob tothe center position. The indicator lightgoes off.

—Seat ventilator

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

68

Push the knob into the recessed positionwhen not in use.

NOTICE

� Do not put unevenly weighted ob-jects on the seat and do not sticksharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)into the seat.

� When cleaning the seats, do notuse organic substances (paint thin-ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,etc.). They may damage the seatventilation/heating system and seatsurface.

� Before cleaning the seats, fullywring out the towel that will beused. Water entering the seats maycause the seat ventilation/heatingsystem to malfunction.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, turn the switches offwhen the engine is not running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicleare designed for people of adult size,large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”on page 98 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and the seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

Do not allow any children to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. Holding a child in your armsdoes not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

Seat belts——Seat belt precautions


69

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

� Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

� Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thedriver and the front passenger aresitting up straight and well back inthe seats. If you are reclined, thelap belt may slide past your hipsand apply restraint forces directlyto the abdomen or your neck maycontact the shoulder belt. In theevent of a frontal co llision, themore the seat is reclined, the great-er the risk of death or serious inju-ry.

� Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or doors.

� Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

� Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers, or allow them to come intocontact with the belts—they mayseverely weaken the belts. (See“Cleaning the interior” on page 337in Section 5.)

� Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.

Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit upstraight and well back in the seat. Tofasten your belt, pull it out of the re-tractor and insert the tab into thebuckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

—Fastening front and rearseat belts

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

70

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 98 in this Section.) Tofree the belt again, fully retract the beltand then pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

Keep as low onhips as possible

Take upslack

Too high

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon hips as possible.

� Do not place the shoulder belt un-der your arm.


71

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.

After adjustment, make sure the anchor islocked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your s houlder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causedeath or serious injuries in a colli-sion.

To release the belt, press the bucklerelease button and allow the belt toretract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

72

The seat belt comfort guides for therear seat outboard positions will pro-vide added seat belt comfort for chil-dren who have outgrown child re-straints and for small adults. When theoutboard shoulder belt is insertedthrough the guide, the comfort guidepulls the belt away from the neck andhead of an occupant.

To use the comfort guide, do as fol-lows.

Seat belt comfort guides are stored in theboth pockets on the sides of the rearseatback.

INSTALLING THE COMFORT GUIDE

Adjust the seatback to the upright mostposition.

1. Pull the comfort guide from thepocket.

—Seat belt comfort guides


73

2. Pinch the two edges of the shoulderbelt for the rear seat outboard posi-tion with your fingers and slide thebelt past the slot of the guide asshown above. At this time, the elas-tic cord must be behind the seatbelt.

CAUTION

Make sure the belt is not twisted andthat it lies flat. The elastic cord mustbe behind the belt and the guidemust be on the front.

3. Buckle, position and release the seatbelt. (For wearing the seat belt, see“—Fastening front and rear seatbelts” on page 69 in this Section.)

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center of theshoulder. The belt should be keptaway from the neck, and should notfall off the shoulder. Failure to ob-serve these precautions could reducethe effectiveness of the seat belt inan accident, causing death or seriousinjury.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

74

REMOVING AND STORING THECOMFORT GUIDE

Pinch the two edges of the seat belttogether so that you can slide them outof the guide. Store the guide with theelastic cord into the pocket.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, remove and store thecomfort guide in its pocket when it isnot in use.

The rear seat belt buckles can bestowed when not in use.

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-curely because they are not long enough,a personalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer sothat the dealer can order the proper re-quired length for the extender. Bring theheaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-er measurement and selection of length.Additional ordering information is availableat your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt restraint system in case ofan accident, increasing the chance ofdeath or serious injury.

� Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, foranother person, or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended.

—Stowing the rear seat beltbuckles —Seat belt extender


75

� If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

� Make sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated whenusing the seat belt extender for thefront passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, disc onnect the extendertongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt.Reconnect the seat belt extenderafter making sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated. If youuse the seat belt extender while the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, the front p assengerairbag and side airbag on the frontpassenger side may not activatecorrectly, causing death or seriousinjury in the event of collision.

� Be sure to wear the seat belt with-out the seat belt extender if youcan fasten the seat belt without theextender.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

76

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.

As far as the seat belt extender on thefront passenger side is concerned, do notfail to disconnect the extender from theseat belt after the above operation in or-der to activate the front passenger airbagcorrectly when getting into the vehiclenext time.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portion ofthe belt and the seat belt extenderare not twisted.


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

The driver and front passenger seatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in response to a severe fron-tal impact.

When the sensor detects a severe frontalimpact, the front seat belts are quicklydrawn back by the retractors so that thebelts snugly restrain the occupants.

—Seat belt pretensioners


77

The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er will not activate if no passenger isdetected in the front passenger seat bythe front passenger occupant classificationsystem. However, the front passenger’sseat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-gage is put on the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “—Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 94 in thisSection.)

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-bags may not operate together in all colli-sions.

The seat belt pretensioner system con-sists mainly of the following components,and their locations are shown in the il-lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indi-cator lights

4. Front passenger occupant classificationsystem (ECU and sensors)

5. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch

7. Airbag sensor assembly

The seat belt pretensioners are controlledby the airbag sensor assembly. The airbagsensor assembly consists of a safing sen-sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated, an operating noise may be heardand a small amount of non−toxic gas maybe released. This does not indicate thata fire is occurring. This gas is normallyharmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners havebeen activated, the seat belt retractorsremain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe seat belt pretensioner assemblies,airbag sensor or surrounding area orwiring. Failure to follow these instruc-tions may prevent the seat belt pre-tensioners from activating correctly,cause sudden operation of the systemor disable the system, which couldresult in death or serious injury. Con-sult your Toyota dealer about any re-pair and modification.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

78

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theseat belt pretensioners in somecases.

� Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two−way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

� Repairs on or near the front seatbelt retractor assemblies

� Modification of the suspension sys-tem

� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion switch is set at ON. It goes offafter about 6 seconds. This means theseat belt pretensioners are operatingproperly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system, “AIRBAG ON” indi-cator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-ors, interconnecting wiring and powersources. (For details, see “Service remind-er indicators and warning buzzers” onpage 145 in Section 1−6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.

� The light does not come on when theignition switch is set at ON or remainson for more than 6 seconds.

� The light comes on while driving.

� If any seat belt does not retract orcannot be pulled out due to a malfunc-tion or activation of the relevant seatbelt pretensioner.

� The seat belt pretensioner assembly orsurrounding area has been damaged.


79

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe seat belt pretensioners to operate.

� Either seat belt pretensioner assemblyor surrounding area is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) front airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCEDAIRBAGS” designed based on US motorvehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). Theairbag system controls airbag deploymentpower for the driver and front passenger.The driver airbag system consists of thedriver seat’s position sensor, etc. Thefront passenger’s airbag system consistsof the front passenger occupant classifica-tion sensor, etc.

In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS front airbags work with the seatbelts to help reduce injury by inflating.The SRS front airbags help reduce injuriesmainly to the driver’s or front passenger’shead, chest or knee caused by hitting thevehicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will notactivate if there is no passenger sitting inthe front passenger seat. However, thefront passenger airbag may deploy if lug-gage is put in the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up, regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “—Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 94 in thisSection.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

SRS airbags——SRS driver airbag, driverknee airbag and frontpassenger airbag

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

80

CAUTION

� The SRS front airbag system is de-signed only as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driver andfront passenger seat belt systems.The driver and front passenger canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. Forinstructions and precautions con-cerning the seat belt system, see“Seat belts” on page 68 in this Sec-tion.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing front airbags. An infant or childwho is too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 98 in thisSection.

The SRS front airbags are designed todeploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-sions where the magnitude and durationof the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle exceeds the designed thresholdlevel.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if theseverity of the impact is above the de-signed threshold level, comparable to anapproximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collisionwhen the vehicle has the impact straightinto a fixed barrier that does not move ordeform.

However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if the vehicle is involved in anunderride collision (e.g. a collision inwhich the front of the vehicle “underrides”,or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisionswhere the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle is very close to the designed thresh-old level, the SRS front airbags and theseat belt pretensioners may not activatetogether.

Always wear your seat belts properly.


81

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not generallydesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a side or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed frontal collision. But, when ever acollision of any type causes sufficientforward deceleration of the vehicle, de-ployment of the SRS front airbags mayoccur.

Hitting a curb,edge of pavementor hard surface

Falling into orjumping overa deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deployif a serious impact occurs to the under-side of your vehicle. Some examplesare shown in the illustration.

The SRS front airbag system consistsmainly of the following components, andtheir locations are shown in the illustra-tion.

1. Front airbag sensors


3. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)



6. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

7. Driver’s seat position sensor

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

82


9. Knee airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

10. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)


The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.If an impact results in a forward decelera-tion beyond the designed threshold level,the system triggers the airbag inflators. Atthis time a chemical reaction in the infla-tors very quickly fills the airbags withnon−toxic gas to help restrain the forwardmotion of the occupants. The front airbagsthen quickly deflate, so that there is noobstruction of the driver’s vision should itbe necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce aloud noise and release some smoke andresidue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, primarily to the head and chest, itmay also cause other, less severe injuriesto the face, chest, arms and hands. Theseare usually in the nature of minor burnsor abrasions and swelling, but the force ofa deploying airbag can cause more seri-ous injuries, especially if an occupant’shands, arms, chest or head is in closeproximity to the airbag module at the timeof deployment. This is why it is importantfor the occupant to; avoid placing anyobject or part of the body between theoccupant and the airbag module; sitstraight and well back into the seat; wearthe available seat belt properly; and sit asfar as possible from the airbag module,while still maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, lower portion of driver’s side instru-ment panel, airbag cover and inflator) maybe hot for several minutes after deploy-ment, so do not touch! The airbags inflateonly once. The windshield may be dam-aged by absorbing some of the force ofthe inflating airbag.


83

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel, lowerportion of driver’s side instrumentpanel or dashboard during airbag de-ployment can be killed or seriouslyinjured. Toyota strongly recommendsthat:

� The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

� The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

� All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

� If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

For instructions and precautions con-cerning the seating position, see“—Front seat precautions” on page56 in this Section.

� Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean against the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use, since thefront passenger airbag could inflatewith considerable speed and force.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, an airbag when it inflates,can be killed or seriously injured.Sit up straight and well back in theseat, and always use your seat beltproperly.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

84

� Toyota strongly recommends that allinfants and children be placed inthe rear seat of the vehicle and beproperly restrained.

� Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 98 in this Sec-tion.

� Do not put anything or any part ofyour body on or in front of thedashboard, lower portion of driver’sside instrument panel or steeringwheel pad that houses the front air-bag system. They might restrictinflation or cause death or seriousinjury as they are projected rear-ward by the force of the deployingairbags. Likewise, the driver andfront passenger should not hold ob-jects in their arms or on theirknees.

� If the vinyl cover is put on the areawhere the SRS knee airbag willdeploy, be sure to remove it.

� Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components, such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, dashboardnear the front passenger airbag,front passenger airbag cover, frontpassenger airbag, driver knee air-bag or airbag sensor assembly. Do-ing so may prevent the front airbagsystem from activating correctly,cause sudden activation of the sys-tem or disable the system, whichcould result in death or serious in-jury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with a physical disability,consult your Toyota dealer. It maydangerously interfere with the SRSfront airbags operation.


85

� Vehicle with key cylinder−type igni-tion switch—Do not attach anyheavy, sharp or hard objects suchas keys or accessories to the igni-tion switch. The objects may re-strict the SRS knee airbag inflationor be thrust into the driver’s seatarea by the force of the deployingairbag, thus causing a danger.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.



� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel, lower portion of driver’s sideinstrument panel or dashboard nearthe front passenger airbag

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion switch is set at ON. It goes offafter about 6 seconds. This means theSRS front airbags are operating proper-ly.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

86





The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light will come on if there is amalfunction in the front passenger occu-pant classification system.


� The SRS front airbags have been in-flated.

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS front airbags to inflate.

� The pad section of the steering wheel,lower portion of driver’s side instrumentpanel or front passenger airbag cover(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.


87

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-bags are designed to provide furtherprotection for the driver, front passen-ger and rear outboard passengers inaddition to the primary safety protec-tion provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags and curtain shield air-bags work with the seat belts to helpreduce injury by inflating. The SRS sideairbags help reduce injuries mainly to thedriver’s or front passenger’s chest and theSRS curtain shield airbags help reduceinjuries mainly to the driver’s, front pas-senger’s or rear outboard passenger’shead.

The SRS side airbag on the passengerseat will not activate if there is no pas-senger sitting in the front passenger seat.However, the side airbag on the passen-ger seat may deploy if luggage is put inthe seat, or the seat belt is buckled up,regardless of the presence of an occupantin the seat. (As for the front passengeroccupant classification system, see“—Front passenger occupant classificationsystem” on page 94 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-vate even when the side airbags are notactivated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

� The SRS side airbag and curtainshield airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver, frontpassenger and rear outboard pas-senger seat belt systems. To ensuremaximum protection in an accident,the driver and all passengers in thevehicle must wear their seat beltsproperly. Wearing a seat belt prop-erly during an accident reduces thechances of death or serious injuryor being thrown out of the vehicle.For instructions and precautionsconcerning the seat belt system,see “Seat belts” on page 68 in thisSection.

—SRS side airbags andcurtain shield airbags

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

88

� Do not allow anyone to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the door or the area of theseat, front p illar, rear pillar or roofside rail from which the SRS sideairbag and curtain shield airbagdeploy even if he/she is a childseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the SRS side air-bag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact of the deploy-ing airbags could cause death orserious injury to the occupant.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seats of the vehicle and prop-erly restrained. The rear seats arethe safest for infants and children.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page98 in this Section.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system may not activate if thevehicle is subjected to a collision fromthe side at certain angles, or a collisionto the side of the vehicle body otherthan the passenger compartment asshown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are designed to inflate when thepassenger compartment area suffers a se-vere impact from the side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.


89

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are not generally designed toinflate if the vehicle is involved in afront or rear collision, if it rolls over,or if it is involved in a low−speed sidecollision.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system consists mainly of the fol-lowing components, and their locations areshown in the illustration.



3. Curtain shield airbag modules(airbag and inflator)


5. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

6. Curtain shield airbag sensors

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors



The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system is controlled by the airbagsensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-sembly consists of a safing sensor andairbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side andcurtain shield airbag sensor and/or thecurtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) theside airbag inflators and/or the curtainshield airbag inflators. At this time achemical reaction in the inflators quicklyfills the airbags with non−toxic gas to helprestrain the lateral motion of the occu-pants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

90

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the frontand rear pillars, and roof side rail may behot for several minutes, but the airbagsthemselves will not be hot. The airbagsare designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags inflate with considerableforce. To reduce the possibility ofdeath or serious injury when they in-flate, the driver, front passenger andrear outboard passengers must:

� Wear their seat belts properly.

� Remain properly seated with theirbacks upright and against the seatsat all times.

� Do not allow anyone to lean againstthe door when the vehicle is in use,since the side airbag and curtainshield airbag could inflate with con-siderable speed and force. Other-wise, he/she may be killed or seri-ously injured. Special care shouldbe taken especially when you havea small child in the vehicle.

� Sit up straight and well back in theseat, distributing your weight evenlyin the seat. Do not apply excessiveweight to the outer side of theseats with a side airbag and to thefront pillar, rear pillar and roof siderail with a curtain shield airbag.

� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead close to the area where theside airbag and curtain shield air-bag inflate, since these airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.


91

� Do not allow anyone to kneel onthe passenger seat, facing the pas-senger’s side door, since the sideairbag and curtain shield airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead or hands out of windows,since the curtain shield airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

� Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force, or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

92

� Do not attach a microphone or anyother device or object around thearea where the curtain shield airbagactivates such as on the windshieldglass, side door glass, front andrear pillars, roof side rail and assistgrips. When the curtain shield air-bag inflates, the microphone or oth-er device or object will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury.

� Do not hook a hanger, heavy orsharp pointed objects on the coathook. If the curtain shield airbaginflates, those items will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury. When you hang clothes,hang them on the coat hook direct-ly.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such changes may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.

� Do not disassemble or repair thefront and rear pillars and roof siderail containing the curtain shieldairbags. Such changes may disablethe system or cause the curtainshield airbags to inflate accidental-ly, resulting in death or serious in-jury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with a physical disability,consult your Toyota dealer. It maydangerously interfere with the SRSside airbags and curtain shield air-bags operation.


93

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system in some cases.



� Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

� Repairs made on or near the con-sole or front seat

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion switch is set at ON. It goes offafter about 6 seconds. This means theSRS side airbags and curtain shield air-bags are operating properly.






’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

94


� Any of the SRS side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags have been inflated.

� The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags to inflate.

� The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

� The portion of the front pillars, rearpillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-ding) containing the curtain shield air-bags inside (shaded in the illustration)is scratched, cracked, or otherwisedamaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a frontpassenger occupant classification sys-tem. This system detects the conditions1—4 in the table on page 96 and basedon these conditions activates or deacti-vates the following systems;

� Front passenger airbag

� Side airbag on the front passengerseat

� Front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er

The system monitors the weight andload on the front passenger seat, andthe seat belt buckle switch to determineconditions 1—4.

In order for the system to detect theconditions correctly, do not do any ofthe following:

� Apply a heavy load to the front pas-senger seat or equipment (e.g. seat-back pocket).

� Do not use a seat accessory, such asa cushion or seat cover, that coversthe seat cushion surface.

� Put weight on the front passenger seatby putting your hands or feet on theseatback from the rear passenger seat.

—Front passenger occupantclassification system


95

The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights indicate the actuation ofthe front passenger airbag, side airbagon the front passenger seat and frontpassenger’s seat belt pretensioner.

The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light will beilluminated when the ignition switch is setat ON with the condition 2 in the tableshown below.

If the front passenger occupant classifica-tion system determines that a person ofadult size sits in the front passenger seatbut the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, one of the following is likelyto have occurred:

� A rear passenger lifts the front passen-ger seat cushion with their legs.

� Objects are placed under the front pas-senger seat.

� The front passenger seatback is incontact with the rear seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects anadult sitting in the front passenger seat,make sure the above do not occur.

Make sure that the “AIRBAG ON” indicatorlight is illuminated when an adult isseated in the front passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illumina-ted, ask the passenger to sit up straight,well back in the seat, and with the seatbelt worn correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light still remains illuminated, ei-ther ask the passenger to move to therear seat, or if that is not possible, movethe front passenger seat fully rearward.

The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights will be illuminated ini-tially when the ignition switch is set atON. After about 4 seconds, they will gooff. After that, the front passenger oc-cupant classification system operatesand judges which indicator light be illu-minated.

The SRS warning light and “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light will come on ifthere is a malfunction in the front pas-senger occupant classification system.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

96

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Indicator/warning light Devices

Condition detectedby the front

passenger occupantclassification system

“AIRBAG ON” and“AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights

SRS warninglight

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltreminder light

Frontpassenger

airbag

Side airbagon the frontpassenger

seat

Curtain shieldairbag in the

frontpassenger

side

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltpretensioner

1. Adult∗1 “AIRBAG ON” Off Flashing∗4 Activated

2. Child∗2 or childrestraint system∗3 “AIRBAG OFF” Off Flashing∗4 Deactivated Activated

3. Unoccupied Not illuminated Off Off DeactivatedActivated

Deactivated

4. There is amalfunction in thesystem

“AIRBAG OFF” On Off Deactivated

Activated

Activated

∗1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system mayrecognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/heras an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗3: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only beinstalled on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 98 in this Section as for installing thechild restraint system.)∗4:In the event that the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.


97

CAUTION

To avoid potential death or seriousinjury when the front passenger occu-pant classification system does notdetect the conditions correctly, ob-serve the following.

� Do not recline the front passengerseat seatback so that it interfereswith a rear seat as it may cause the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light be il-luminated. If the seatback interfereswith the rear seat, return the seat-back to a position where it doesnot interfere with the rear seat.

Keep the front passenger seatbackas upright as possible when the ve-hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-back excessively may lessen the ef-fectiveness of the seat belt system.

� Make sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated whenusing the seat belt extender for thefront passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, disc onnect the extendertongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt.Reconnect the seat belt extenderafter making sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated. If youuse the seat belt extender while the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, the front p assengerairbag and side airbag on the frontpassenger side may not activatecorrectly, which could cause deathor serious injury in the event ofcollision.

� If an adult sits in the frontpassenger seat, the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light should be illumi-nated. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated, askthe passenger to sit up straight,well back in the seat, feet on thefloor, and with the seat belt worncorrectly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light still remains illumi-nated, either ask the passenger tomove to the rear seat, or if that isnot possible, move the frontpassenger seat fully rearward.

� Wear the seat belt properly.

� Make sure the front passenger’sseat belt tab has not been left in-serted into the buckle before some-one sits in the front passengerseat.

� Do not apply a heavy load to thefront passenger seat or equipment(e.g. seatback pocket).

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

98

� Do not put weight on the front pas-senger seat by putting your handsor feet on the front passenger seatseatback from the rear passengerseat.

� Do not let a rear passenger lift thefront passenger seat with their feetor press on the seatback with theirlegs.

� Do not put objects under the frontpassenger seat.

� Child restraint systems installed onthe rear seat should not contact thefront seatbacks.

� When it is unavoidable to install theforward−facing child restraint sys-tem on the front passenger seat,install the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in theproper order. (As for the installationorder, see “—Child restraint sys-tem” on page 100 in this Section.)

� Do not remove the seat.

� Do not kick the front passengerseat or subject it to severe impact.Otherwise, the SRS warning lightmay come on to indicate a malfunc-tion of the detection system. In thiscase, contact your Toyota dealer im-mediately.

The “AIRBAG ON” indicator light may beilluminated (the front passenger airbag andside airbag on the front passenger seatmay deploy) even if observing the abovecautions, when a child sits in, or a for-ward−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passenger seat. Re-fer to all the cautions in “SRS airbags” onpage 79 and “Child restraint” describedbelow.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-propriate child restraint systems forchildren.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 68 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

� For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops, achild must be properly restrained,using a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on the age andsize of the child. Holding a child inyour arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an acci-dent, the child can be crushedagainst the windshield, or betweenyou and the vehicle’s interior.

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions


99

� Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,installed on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the force ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag can cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

� A forward−facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to beinstalled on the front passengerseat only when it is unavoidable.Always move the seat as far backas possible even if the “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light is illuminated,because the front passenger airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, thechild may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/herbody against the door or the areaof the seat, front or rear pillar orroof side rail from which the sideairbags or curtain shield airbagsdeploy even if the child is seated inthe child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the side airbag and/orcurtain shield airbag inflate, and theimpact could cause death or seri-ous injury to the child.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

� Make sure you have complied withall installation instructions providedby the child restraint manufacturerand that the system is properly se-cured. If it is not secured properly,it may cause death or serious injuryto the child in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

100

A child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’sinstructions which accompany the childrestraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer. General directions are alsoprovided under the following instructions.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit in the trunk or somewhere other thanthe passenger compartment. This will pre-vent it from injuring passengers in theevent of a sudden stop or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to use the an-chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” onpage 112 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-proved for your vehicle may also be used.See “—Installation with child restraint low-er anchorages” on page 114 in this Sec-tion.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

—Child restraint system—Types of child restraintsystem


101

(C) Booster seat(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear−facing position only.

CAUTION

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the impact ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag could cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

—Installation with seat belt

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

102

� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the rear seat if it interfereswith the lock mechanism of thefront seats. Otherwise, the child orfront seat occupant(s) may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat.

Same angle

� When installing a child restraintsystem in the rear center position,adjust both seatbacks to the sameangle. Otherwise, the child restraintsystem cannot be securely re-strained and this may cause deathor serious injuries in a collision.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.


103

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from death or serious injury.Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-ately. Do not install the childrestraint system on the seat untilthe seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

104

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-ward−facing or rear−facing position de-pending on the age and size of thechild. When installing, follow themanufacturer’s instructions about theappropriate age and size of the child aswell as directions for installing thechild restraint system.


105

Install the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat only when it is un-avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with afront passenger occupant classificationsystem. In order to activate the occupantclassification system correctly, install theforward−facing child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in the followingorder:

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

2. Move the front passenger seat to therearward position.

3. Put the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat without puttingyour weight on the front passengerseat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seatbelt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended. To hold the seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION


7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-tem and secure the child, complyingwith the instructions provided by thechild restraint system manufacturer.

The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light shouldbe illuminated when the ignition switch isset at ON and the child is in the childrestraint system after following these pro-cedures. The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lightindicates the SRS front passenger airbagand side airbag on the passenger side willnot deploy. If the “AIRBAG ON” indicatorlight is illuminated, remove the child re-straint system and reinstall it with the en-gine off. If the “AIRBAG ON” indicatorlight is illuminated when the ignition switchis set to ON, then the SRS front passen-ger airbag and side airbag on the passen-ger side may deploy in an accident. Donot drive the vehicle in this condition. Re-move the child restraint system and con-tact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat. A forward−facing child re-straint system should only beinstalled on the front passengerseat when unavoidable. If you mustinstall the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat, put theseat in its most rearward position,and install the forward−facing childrestraint system in the proper or-der. Otherwise, the front passengeroccupant classification system cannot detect the presence of the childrestraint system and the front pas-senger airbag and side airbag onthe front passenger seat coulddeploy, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

106

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the impact ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag could cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

Move seatfully back


� Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/herbody against the door or the areaof the seat, front or rear pillar orroof side rail from which the sideairbags or curtain shield airbagsdeploy even if the child is seated inthe child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the side airbag and cur-tain shield airbag inflate, and theimpact could cause death or seri-ous injury to the child.


107


� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat.

Same angle


1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

108

CAUTION




2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.


109

CAUTION


4. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat must be used in for-ward−facing position only.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

110

Move seatfully back

CAUTION


� Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/herbody against the door or the areaof the seat, front or rear pillar orroof side rail from which the sideairbags or curtain shield airbagsdeploy even if the child is seated inthe child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the side airbag and cur-tain shield airbag inflate, and theimpact could cause death or seri-ous injury to the child.

Same angle



111

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Runthe lap and shoulder belt through oraround the booster seat and across thechild following the instructions providedby its manufacturer and insert the tabinto the buckle taking care not to twistthe belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” onpage 68 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

� Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s s houlder.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt position as lowon a child’s hips as possible.

� For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.




’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

112

2. To remove the booster seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract.

Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

Symbol

Anchor brackets

Use the anchor bracket on the packagetray behind the rear seat to attach the topstrap.

Anchor brackets are installed for eachrear seating position.

This symbol indicates the locations of theanchor brackets.

—Using a top strap


113

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Lower the head restraint.

2. Open the lid of the anchor bracket. 3. Securely fasten the child restraintsystem with the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 98 in this Section.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

114

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the head restraint orthe seat after securing the child re-straint system.

� Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the childrestraint system is secure by push-ing and pulling it in different direc-tions.

Follow all the installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.

Lower anchorages for the child restraintsystems complying with the FMVSS225or CMVSS210.2 specifications areinstalled in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the gapbetween the seat cushion and seatback ofboth outboard rear seats.

Child restraint systems complying with theFMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specificationcan be fixed to these anchorages. In thiscase, it is not necessary to fix the childrestraint system with a seat belt on thevehicle.

Most leanedposition

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

1. Adjust the seatback to the mostleaned position.

Make sure the seatback is locked secure-ly.

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages


115

Canada only

Type A

Canada only

Type B

2. Widen the gap between the seatcushion and seatback slightly andconfirm the position of the lower an-chorages near the buttons on theseatback.

3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lowerstraps onto the anchorages andtighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto theanchorages.

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint systemindicates the presence of a lower connec-tor system.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap” on page 112 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-tion manual equipped with each product.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

116

CAUTION

� When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

� Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.

� After securing the child restraintsystem, never recline the seat.



117

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSSteering wheel and MirrorsTilt and telescopic steering wheel 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 4

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

118

TILT STEERING WHEEL

To change the steering wheel angle,hold the steering wheel, push down thetilt lock release lever, tilt the steeringwheel to the desired angle and releasethe lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi-tion, it will spring up as you release thelock release lever.

TELESCOPIC STEERING WHEEL

To change the steering wheel columnlength, hold the steering wheel, pushdown the telescopic lock release lever,push or pull the steering wheel to thedesired length and return the lever toits original position.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. Doingso may cause the driver to mishan-dle the vehicle and an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

� After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down or for-ward and rearward to make sure itis locked in position.

Tilt and telescopic steeringwheel


119

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the side of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s sidebecause it is a convex mirror. Any objectseen in a convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than when seen in a flatmirror.

Vehicles with the auto anti−glare insiderear view mirror—

When the inside rear view mirror surfacedarkens in automatic mode, the driver’sside and front passenger’s side (on somemodels) outside rear view mirror surfacealso darkens to reduce the reflection ofthe headlights of the vehicle behind you.(For details, see “Auto anti−glare insiderear view mirror” on page 121 in this Sec-tion.)

When you push the rear window defoggerswitch, the heater panels in the outsiderear view mirrors will quickly clear thesurface. (See “Rear window and outsiderear view mirror defoggers” on page 140in Section 1−5.)

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle thevehicle and an accident may occurresulting in death or serious inju-ries.

� On some models, since the mirrorsurfaces can get hot, do not touchthem when the defogger switch ison.

NOTICE

The outside rear view mirrors arefixed in place. Do not try to fold themirrors. It may damage the mirrors.

Outside rear view mirrors—

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

120

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPush the switch at “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

The mirrors can be adjusted when theignition switch is set at the ACC or ON.

Vehicles with the driving position memorysystem—The position of the outside rearview mirrors and driver’s seat can bememorized. For details, see “Driving posi-tion memory system” on page 60 in Sec-tion 1−3.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de−icer to freethe mirror.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving, operate the lever on the loweredge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

—Power rear view mirrorcontrol

Anti−glare inside rear viewmirror


121

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti−glare function. The function is designedto reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving.

When the ignition switch is set to ON, theinside rear view mirror always turns on inthe automatic function mode.

The indicator illuminates to show you thatthe function is on.

In automatic function mode, if the mirrordetects light from the headlights of thevehicle behind you, the mirror surfacedarkens slightly to reduce the reflectedlight.

To turn off the automatic function, press

the “ ” switch.

To turn on the automatic function again,

press the “ ” switch.

Adjust it before driving so that the rearview is optimized.

When the inside air temperature is low, itmay take a little longer for the mirror todarken in response to the detection ofheadlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

Auto anti−glare inside rearview mirror

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

122

To ensure correct functioning of anti−glare mirror sensors located on bothsides of the mirror, do not touch orcover the sensors with your finger ora piece of cloth, etc.

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the front—Swingdown the sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the side—Swingdown the sun visor, remove it from thehook and swing it to the lateral side (posi-tion 2).

If glare comes from obliquely behind you,slide the sun visor backward (to position3).

CAUTION

Do not slide the sun visor when thevisor is in the position 1. It can coverthe anti−glare inside rear view mirrorand obstruct the rear view.

Sun visors—


123

To use the vanity mirrors, swing downthe sun visor and open the cover.

The vanity lights come on when you openthe cover.

To adjust the brightness of the lights, slidethe switch.

—Vanity mirrors

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

124


125

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSLights, Wipers and DefoggerHeadlights and turn signals 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog lights 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior light 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front personal lights 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear personal lights 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated entry system 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 140. . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 5

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

126

HEADLIGHTS

Manual operation—

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, side marker, tail, li-cense plate and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

The headlight indicator lights up in theinstrument cluster.

Automatic operation—

To turn on or off the lights automatical-ly, twist the headlight/turn signal leverknob to the “AUTO” position when theignition switch is set at ON.

The headlights and/or all of the lights inposition 1 automatically turn on or off de-pending on the darkness of the surround-ings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2to turn on the headlights if they are need-ed immediately when entering a dark tun-nel, parking structure, etc.

The automatic light control sensor is onthe top of the center instrument panel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

If you feel that the automatic light controlcomes into operation too early or too late,have the sensor adjusted by your Toyotadealer.

Headlights and turn signals(for U.S.A.)


127

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1 or “AUTO” position with thetail lights on—

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the engineoff.

Position 2 or “AUTO” position with theheadlights on—

The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when any of the doors or trunklid is opened and closed with the engineoff.

The lights can be turned off immediatelyby pushing the lock switch on the wirelessremote control transmitter with all thedoors locked and the trunk lid closed.

If any of the doors or trunk lid is keptopen, the lights automatically turn off after20 minutes.

To turn on the lights again, turn the igni-tion switch is set at ON or actuate theheadlight switch. If you are going to parkfor over one week, make sure the head-light switch is off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) systemcan make it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day. TheDRL system can be helpful in many differ-ent driving conditions, but they can beespecially helpful in the short periods afterdawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your headlightscome on at a reduced brightness when:

� The engine is running.

� The light switch is in the “AUTO” posi-tion.

� The parking brake is released.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob toposition 1.

Twist the knob to position 2 to turn theheadlights to full intensity for night driving.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knobto the position 3 (“DRL OFF”) or turn theignition switch off.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

128

Automatic headlight leveling system(with discharge headlights)

Vehicle position changes according toloading condition, passengers getting onand off, vehicle acceleration and decelera-tion, etc. However, the headlight beamlevel is always maintained automaticallyby the system at the proper level so thatyour headlights do not dazzle other roadusers.

The warning light will come on when theignition switch is set at ON and will go offafter a few second.

If this system fails, the warning light inthe instrument panel comes on. If thisoccurs, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer.

If you replace the rear suspension and/orthe vehicle height changes, contact yourToyota dealer to check the automaticheadlight leveling system and headlightbeam level.

High−Low beams— For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightseven when the headlight switch is off.


129

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.

The ignition switch must be set at ON.

The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out. See “Replacing lightbulbs” on page 377 in Section 7−3.

HEADLIGHTS

Manual operation—

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, side marker, tail, li-cense plate and instrument panel lights

The tail light indicator lights up in theinstrument cluster.

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

Automatic operation—

To turn on or off the lights automatical-ly, twist the headlight/turn signal leverknob to the position 3 (“AUTO”) whenthe ignition switch is set at ON.

The headlights and/or all of the lights inposition 1 automatically turn on or off de-pending on the darkness of the surround-ings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2to turn on the headlights if they are need-ed immediately when entering a dark tun-nel, parking structure, etc.

Headlights and turn signals(for Canada)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

130

The automatic light control sensor is onthe top of the center instrument panel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

If you feel that the automatic light controlcomes into operation too early or too late,have the sensor adjusted by your Toyotadealer.

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1 or position 3 with the taillights on—

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the engineoff.

Position 2 or position 3 with the head-lights on—

The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when any of the door or trunk lidis opened and closed with the engine off.

The lights can be turned off immediatelyby pushing the lock switch on the wirelessremote control transmitter with all thedoors locked and the trunk lid closed.

If any of the door or trunk lid is keptopened, the lights automatically turn offafter 20 minutes.

To turn on the lights again, turn the igni-tion switch is set at ON or actuate theheadlight switch. If you are going to parkfor over one week, make sure the head-light switch is off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system

The headlights turn on when the parkingbrake is released with the engine started,even with the light switch in the “OFF”position. They will not go off until theignition switch is turned off.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob toposition 1.

Twist the knob to the position 2 to turnthe headlights to full intensity for nightdriving.


131

Automatic headlight leveling system(with discharge headlights)

Vehicle position changes according toloading condition, passengers getting onand off, vehicle acceleration and decelera-tion, etc. However, the headlight beamlevel is always maintained automaticallyby the system at the proper level so thatyour headlights do not dazzle other roadusers.

The warning light will come on when theignition switch is set at ON and will go offafter a few second.

If this system fails, the warning light inthe instrument panel comes on. If thisoccurs, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer.

If you replace the rear suspension and/orthe vehicle height changes, contact yourToyota dealer to check the automaticheadlight leveling system and headlightbeam level.

High−Low beams— For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightseven when the headlight switch is off.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

132

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out. See “Replacing lightbulbs” on page 377 in Section 7−3.

To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the switch onlonger than necessary when the en-gine is not running.

Emergency flashers


133

To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the knob.

With the knob turned fully clockwise, theintensity of the instrument panel lights willnot be reduced even when the tail lights/headlights are turned on.

To turn on the front fog lights, twistthe band of the headlight switch leverto the fog light mark. They will comeon only when the headlights are on lowbeam.

To turn on the interior light, push theswitch.

The interior light switch has the followingpositions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when anydoor is opened. The light goes off whenall the doors are closed. For details, see“Illuminated entry system” on page 135 inthis Section.

Interior light and rear personallights— The rear personal lights can beturned on or off by the interior lightswitch.

Instrument panel light control Front fog lights Interior light

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

134

To turn on the front personal light,push the switch. To turn the light off,push the switch once again.

Personal light switch

Interior light switch

To turn on the rear personal lights, op-erate the interior light switch. Thelights can be turned on or off by push-ing on each button when the interiorlight switch is in the “OFF” or “DOOR”position.

The interior light switch has the followingpositions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turn the lights on only when push-ing on each button.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when anydoor is opened or unlock a door with allthe doors are locked. For details, see “Il-luminated entry system” on page 135 inthis Section.

Front personal lights Rear personal lights


135

Illuminated entry system

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

136

The following lights except the centerconsole illumination and exterior footlights will come on when any of thedoors are opened. After all the doorsare closed, the lights remain on forabout 15 seconds before fading out.

The interior light, front and rear personallight, and the ignition switch light (vehicleswith key cylinder−type ignition switch)come on when the interior light switch isin the “DOOR” position.

1. Ignition switch light

2. Interior light

3. Front personal lights

4. Center console illumination

5. Rear personal lights

6. Exterior foot lights

When any of the doors are unlocked, thelights except the center console illumina-tion and exterior foot lights will come onand remain on for about 15 seconds be-fore fading out.

If all the doors are closed, when the igni-tion switch is turned off, the lights exceptthe center console illumination and exteri-or foot lights will come on and remain onfor about 15 seconds.

If all the doors are closed and the ignitionswitch is set at ACC, the ignition switchlight and interior light will fade out.

If all the doors are locked, all the lightswill fade out.

When the transmission selector lever isplaced out of the “P” position with theignition switch set at ON, the exterior footlights will fade out.

To prevent the battery being discharged,all of the lights will automatically turn offthe key removed (vehicles with key cylin-der−type ignition switch) or the ignition isturned off (vehicles with smart key sys-tem), and the door is left opened forabout 20 minutes.

CENTER CONSOLE ILLUMINATION

The center console illumination comes onwhen the ignition switch is set at ACC orON.

ILLUMINATIONS OF ENTRY FUNCTION(vehicles with smart key system)

The interior light and exterior foot lightscome on and remain on for about 15 sec-onds when you carry the registered keyinto the entry function actuation area. Forfurther information of entry function actua-tion area, see “Smart key system” onpage 27 in Section 1−2.

To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Operation

Position 1 Intermittent operation

Position 2 Low speed operation

Position 3 High speed operation

Position 4 Single sweep operation

Position 5 Washer on

Windshield wipers and washer

(intermittent operation type)


137

Rotating the band on the lever lets youadjust the wiper time interval when thewiper lever is in the intermittent position(position 1). Twist the band upward toincrease the time between sweeps, anddownward to decrease it.

When the lever is set to the intermittentposition (position 1), the wipers move ac-cording to the vehicle speed. The higherthe vehicle speed is, the shorter the inter-mittent time becomes.

When the lever is in the position 2, thewipers operate at low speed while thevehicle is moving and, when it stops, theyswitch to intermittent operation. If the le-ver is shifted “LO” position while the ve-hicle is stopped, the wiper will begin towork in intermittent operation after a cou-ple of wipes at low speed.

This feature can be deactivated. For de-tails, ask your Toyota dealer.

As soon as the vehicle starts to move,the wiper will operate once to clear thedriver’s front view if it is set to “INT”.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you (position 5).

After the washer operates, the wipers op-erate three times in low operation, pausefor several seconds, and then operateonce more. This occurs only if the wiperswitch is in the “OFF” or “INT” position.

The interval between the 3 wipes and thefinal wipe depends on the vehicle speed.The final sweep does not occur if thevehicle speed exceeds 170 km/h (106mph).

The final wipe (after a pause of severalseconds) prevents the washer fluid fromdripping. The final wipe can be set tooccur after a three second pause, or canbe deactivated. For details, ask yourToyota dealer.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 375 inSection 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch the glassor may damage wiper blades.

When waxing your vehicle, make sure thatthe washer nozzles do not becomeblocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,contact your Toyota dealer to have thevehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

138

Automatic control adjuster

To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Operation

Position 1 Automatic operation

Position 2 Low speed operation

Position 3 High speed operation

Position 4 Single sweep operation

Position 5 Washer on

Automatic operation (position 1)

The wiper speed is determined by theamount of raindrops and sunlight detectedby the automatic wiper control sensor.

The automatic wiper control sensor is onthe inside of the windshield as shownabove.

If you feel that the operation of the auto-matic wiper control is too fast or too slow,twist the automatic control adjuster in the“−” direction to lower sensitivity, and “+”direction to boost the sensitivity.

Even if the wiper lever is in the position1, the system will switch to intermittentoperations in the following conditions:

� When the windshield gets extremelycold (at less than −10�C [14�F])

� When the system malfunctions

However, when the windshield gets ex-tremely hot (at more than 90�C [194�F]),the wipers do not operate even if thewiper lever is in the position 1.

As soon as the vehicle starts to move,the wiper will operate once to clear thedriver’s front view if it is set to “AUTO”.

Windshield wipers and washer

(raindrop detection type)


139

CAUTION

Be careful not to get your fingerscaught between the wipers and wind-shield.

When the wiper lever is in the posi-tion 1 with the ignition switch on, thewipers could operate automatically inthe following cases:

� If you touch the upper center of thewindshield adjacent to the sensor.

� If you wipe the upper center of thewindshield (adjacent to which thesensor is located) with a towel orother object.

� If the windshield vibrates.

� If you touch the sensor.

NOTICE

Do not apply detergent to or wet theautomatic wiper control sensor whencleaning the inside of the windshield.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you (position 5).

After the washer operates, the wipers op-erate three times in low operation, pausefor several seconds, and then operateonce more. This occurs only if the wiperswitch is in the “OFF” or “AUTO” position.

The interval between the 3 wipes and thefinal wipe depends on the vehicle speed.The final sweep does not occur if thevehicle speed exceeds 170 km/h (106mph).

The final wipe (after a pause of severalseconds) prevents the washer fluid fromdripping. The final wipe can be set tooccur after a three second pause, or canbe deactivated. For details, ask yourToyota dealer.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 375 inSection 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch the glassor may damage wiper blades.

When waxing your vehicle, make sure thatthe washer nozzles do not becomeblocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,contact your Toyota dealer to have thevehicle serviced.

NOTICE


’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

140

Type A

Type B

To defog or defrost the rear window,push the switch.


The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window will quickly clear the surface.An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethe defogger is operating.

Type B only—The heater panels in theoutside rear view mirrors will also quicklyclear the surfaces. Keep your hands offthe mirror faces when the switch is on.

Push the switch once again to turn thedefoggers off.

The system will automatically shut off af-ter the defogger has operated about 15minutes.

CAUTION

Type B only—Since the mirror sur-faces can get hot, do not touch themwhen the defogger switch is on.

Make sure you turn the defoggers offwhen the surfaces are clear. Leaving thedefoggers on for a long time could causethe battery to discharge, especially duringstop−and−go driving. The defoggers arenot designed for drying rain water or formelting snow.

Type B only—If the outside rear view mir-rors are heavily coated with ice, use aspray de−icer before operating the switch.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Rear window and outside rearview mirror defoggers


141

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicatorsFuel gauge 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and two trip meters 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 6

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

142

Low fuel levelwarning light

The gauge indicates the approximatequantity of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the ignition switch is set at ON.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gaugeneedle may fluctuate or the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature when the ignition switch ison. The engine operating temperaturewill vary with changes in weather andengine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,your engine is too hot. If your vehicleoverheats, stop your vehicle and allow theengine to cool.

Fuel gaugeEngine coolant temperaturegauge


143

Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

� Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

� Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

� Idling for a long period with the airconditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

� Towing a trailer.

NOTICE

� Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

� Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” on page 319 inSection 4.

The tachometer indicates engine speedin thousands of rpm (revolutions perminute). Use it while driving to selectcorrect shift points and to prevent en-gine lugging and over−revving.

Driving with the engine running too fastcauses excessive engine wear and poorfuel economy. Remember, in most casesthe slower the engine speed, the greaterthe fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle getinto the red zone. This may causesevere engine damage.

This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters when the ignitionswitch is set at ON.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

Tachometer Odometer and two trip meters

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

144

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the twotrip meters to zero, and also changethe meter display.

To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the button. The meterdisplay changes in the order from theodometer to trip meter A to trip meterB, then back to the odometer eachtime you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the button until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B.


145

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a)or

(indicator and buzzer)If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e) Stop and check.

(f) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Low fuel level warning light Fill up tank.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

146


(h) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(i)(indicator and buzzer)

Close all doors.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(k) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(l) Adjust tire inflation pressure (including spare tire). If the light blinks, contact Toyota dealer.

(m) Add washer fluid.

(n) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.


147


(o) Replace engine oil.

(p)(indicator and buzzer)

Shift selector lever to “P” and turn off engine. Check key.

(q) Dynamic laser cruise controlmaster warning light

Check condition according to warning code. If system malfunctions, contact Toyotadealer.

(r) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

148

(a) Brake System Warning Light andBuzzer

This light comes on in the following caseswhen the ignition switch is set at ON.

� When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few secondswhen the ignition switch is set at ON evenafter the parking brake is released.

If the vehicle speed rises above 5 km/h(3 mph) with the parking brake applied for1 seconds or more, a buzzer sounds.

� When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following cases:

� The light does not come on even if theparking brake is applied when the igni-tion switch is set at ON.

� The light does not come on even if theignition switch is set at ON with theparking brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, immediately stop your vehicleat a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

� The light does not turn off evenafter the parking brake is releasedwhile the engine is running.

In this case, the brakes may notwork properly and your stoppingdistance will become longer. De-press the brake pedal firmly andbring the vehicle to an immediatestop.

� The brake system warning light re-mains on together with the “ABS”warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely un-stable during braking.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition switch is set at ON orengine start, the reminder light flashesand buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat beltis not fastened. Unless the driver fastensthe belt, the light continues flashing andthe buzzer sounds for about 6 seconds.

If the vehicle speed rises above 15 km/h(9 mph) with the seat belt unfastened, thebuzzer will sound for about 10 seconds.Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,the buzzer will sound in a different tonefor 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle speeddrops below 15 km/h (9 mph), the buzzerwill continue to sound. To stop the buzzer,fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer stillsounds, make sure the front passenger’sseat belt is fastened.


149

(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Re-minder Light and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tohave the front passenger buckle up theseat belt.

Once the ignition switch is set at ON orengine start, the reminder light flashes ifa passenger sits in the front passengerseat and does not fasten the seat belt.Unless the front passenger fastens thebelt, the light continue flashing.

If the vehicle speed rises above 15 km/h(9 mph) with the seat belt unfastened, thebuzzer will sound for about 10 seconds.Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,the buzzer will sound in a different tonefor 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle speeddrops below 15 km/h (9 mph), the buzzerwill continue to sound. To stop the buzzer,fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer stillsounds, make sure the driver’s seat beltis fastened.

If luggage or other load is placed on thefront passenger seat, depending on itsweight, the reminder light to flash andbuzzer to sound.

(d) Charging System Warning Light

This warning light comes on when theignition switch is set at ON, and goes offwhen the engine is started.

When there are problems in the chargingsystem while the engine is running, thewarning light comes on.

NOTICE

When the charging system warninglight comes on while the engine isrunning, malfunctions such as the en-gine drive belt being broken may haveoccurred. If the warning light comeson, immediately stop the vehicle in asafe place and contact your Toyotadealer.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure WarningLight

This light warns that the engine oil pres-sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you aredriving, pull off the road to a safe placeand stop the engine immediately. Call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.

The light may occasionally flicker whenthe engine is idling or it may come onbriefly after a hard stop. There is nocause for concern if it then goes out whenthe engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil levelis extremely low. It is not designed toindicate low oil level, and the oil levelmust be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with thewarning light on—even for one block.It may ruin the engine.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

150

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignitionswitch is set at ON and goes off afterthe engine starts. This means that thewarning light system is operating prop-erly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lampcomes on while driving, first check thefollowings.

� Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-ately.

� Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securelytighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even afterseveral trips, contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fueltank cap is not loose...

� There is a problem somewhere in theengine, emission control system, elec-tronic throttle control system, automatictransmission electrical system or warn-ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe engine off.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a stateemission inspection if the malfunctionindicator lamp remains on. Contact yourToyota dealer to check your vehicle’semission control system and OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) system beforetaking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs” on page 346in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel levelin the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.


151

(h) “ABS” Warning Light

Vehicles without vehicle stab ility controlsystem—

The light comes on with the ignitionswitch is set at ON. If the anti−lock brakesystem works properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if thesystem malfunctions, the light comes onagain.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

If either of the following conditions oc-curs, this indicates a malfunction some-where in the components monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition switch is set at ON or remainson.

� The light comes on while you are driv-ing.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

Vehicles with vehicle stability controlsystem—

The light comes on when the ignitionswitch is set at ON. If the anti−lock brakesystem and the brake assist system workproperly, the light turns off after a fewseconds. Thereafter, if the system mal-functions, the light comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system and the brake as-sist system do not operate, but the brakesystem still operates conventionally.


’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

152


� The light does not come on when theignition switch is set at ON or remainson.



CAUTION



(i) Open Door Warning Light and Buzz-er

This light remains on until all the doorsare completely closed.

The buzzer also sounds once when anyof the doors is not completely closed atthe vehicle speed 5 km/h (3 mph) ormore. Stop the vehicle and close the doorcompletely.

(j) SRS Warning Light

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion switch is set at ON. It goes offafter about 6 seconds. This means theSRS airbags and seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system, “AIRBAG ON” indi-cator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-ors, interconnecting wiring and powersources.






153

(k) “VSC” Warning Light

The light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem or traction control system.

The light will come on when the ignitionswitch is set at ON and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, thevehicle stability control system and trac-tion control system do not work. However,as conventional braking operates when ap-plied, there is no problem to continue yourdriving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer:

� The light does not come on after theignition is turned to on.

� The light is left on after the ignition isturned to on.


(l) Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the tire inflation pres-sure of one or more of your tires is low.The light comes on when the ignitionswitch is set at ON. It goes off after afew seconds. This indicates that the tirepressure warning system is functioningproperly.

If the warning light comes on, stop yourvehicle in a safe place as soon as pos-sible and check that the inflation pressureof all tires is as specified on the tire andloading information label. (See “Checkingtire inflation pressure“ on page 361 inSection 7−2.) The light should go off afew minutes after the tire pressure is ad-justed.

If the warning light comes on after blink-ing for 1 minute, the tire pressure warningsystem may be malfunctioning. Contactyour Toyota dealer.

For details, see “Tire pressure warningsystem” on page 169 in Section 1−7.

(m) Low Windshield Washer Fluid LevelWarning Light

The light warns that the windshield washerfluid level is too low. Add washer fluid atyour earliest opportunity. (For instructions,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 375 inSection 7−3.)

The light will come on when the ignitionswitch is set at ON and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

(n) Automatic Headlight Leveling Sys-tem Warning Light

This light warns that when there is aproblem somewhere in the automaticheadlight leveling system.

The light will come on when the ignitionswitch is set at ON and will go off aftera few seconds.

If it comes on, have your vehicle checkedby your Toyota dealer.

(o) Engine Oil Replacement ReminderLight (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light acts as a reminder to replacethe engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignitionswitch is set at ON and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500miles) after the engine oil replacement,this light illuminates for about 3 secondsand then flashes for about 15 secondswith the ignition switch is set at ON. Ifyou continue driving without replacing theengine oil, and if the distance driven ex-ceeds 8000 km (5000 miles), the light willcome on after the ignition switch is set atON. The light will remain on thereafter.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

154

If the light is flashing, we recommend thatyou replace the engine oil at an earlyopportunity depending on the driving androad conditions. If the light comes on,replace it as soon as possible.

The system must be reset after the en-gine oil replacement. Reset the system bythe following procedure:

1. Turn the engine off with the odometerreading shown. (For details, see“Odometer and two trip meters” onpage 143 in this Section.)

2. Turn the ignition switch is set at ONwhile holding down the trip meter resetknob.

Hold down the knob for at least 5 sec-onds. The odometer indicates “000000”and the light goes off.

If the system fails to reset, the light willcontinue flashing.

(p) Smart Key System Warning Lightand Buzzer

The light and buzzer warn that there is aproblem somewhere in the operation ofthe smart key system. See “Driving andparking using smart key system” on page300 in Section 3.

(q) Dynamic Laser Cruise Control Mas-ter Warning Light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the dynamic laser cruisecontrol system.

The light will come on when the ignitionswitch is set at ON and go off after a fewseconds.

When the light comes on, the alarmsounds and the warning code will appearon the display. At this time, dynamic lasercruise control is cancelled. For details,see “Dynamic laser cruise control” onpage 179 in Section 1−7.

(r) Key Reminder Buzzer (vehicles withkey cylinder−type ignition switch)

This buzzer act as a reminder to removethe key when you open the driver’s doorwith the engine off.

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDERINDICATORS (except the low fuel levelwarning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the doors.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Set the ignition switch at ON, but donot start the engine.All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light shouldcome on. The “ABS” and “VSC” warn-ing lights, tire pressure warning light,low windshield washer fluid level warn-ing light, automatic headlight levelingsystem warning light, engine oil re-placement reminder light and dynamiclaser cruise master warning light go offafter a few seconds. The SRS warninglight goes off after about 6 seconds.(slip indicator light and “READY” [dy-namic laser cruise ready mode] indica-tor light also come on and go off aftera few seconds. Front passenger occu-pant classification indicator lights alsocome on and go off after about 4 sec-onds.)


155

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

156


157

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSIgnition switch, Transmission and Parking brakeIgnition switch 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction control system 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle stability control system 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire pressure warning system 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic laser cruise control 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 7

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

158

“START”—Starter motor on. The keywill return to the “ON” position whenreleased.

For starting tips, see page 295 in Section3.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessorieson.

This is the normal driving position.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radiooperate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key at the “ACC” or“LOCK” position and open the driver’sdoor, a buzzer will remind you to removethe key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steeringwheel is locked. The key can be re-moved only at this position.

The selector lever must be put in the “P”position before turning the key from “ACC”to the “LOCK” position.

Once you remove the key, the engine im-mobilizer system is automatically set. (See“Engine immobilizer system” on page 16in Section 1−2.)

When starting the engine, the key mayseem stuck at the “LOCK” position. Tofree it, first be sure the key is pushed allthe way in, and then rock the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key gently.

Approximately five hours after the engineis turned off, you may hear sound comingfrom underneath the luggage compartmentfor several minutes. This is normal opera-tion and does not indicate a malfunction.(See “Leak detection pump” on page viii.)

It is not a malfunction if the needle on allmeters and gauges move slightly when thekey is turned to the “ACC”, “ON” or“START” position.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key at the “ON” ifthe engine is not running. The batterywill discharge and the ignition couldbe damaged.

Ignition switch (with key cylinder−typeignition switch)


159

When the key is in the vehicle, press-ing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch(engine switch) allows you to start andstop the engine or choose at the ACC,ON, or ignition switch off.

When the brake pedal is not depressed,pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”switch changes the ignition switch modeas follows. Press the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch slowly and firmly.

First time—ACC (accessory) mode ( illu-minate amber)Accessories such as the radio operate.

Second time—ON mode (illuminate am-ber)Power on and all accessories on.

Third time—Power off (indicator lightoff)

Pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”switch again returns the ignition switch tothe ACC.

If a buzzer sounds and the smart keysystem warning light comes on for 5 sec-onds when pressing the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch, this indicates that the keyis not in the vehicle.

Ignition switch (with smart key system)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

160

If the brake pedal is depressed, the in-dicator light will turn green, regardlessof which mode is selected. When theindicator light is green, pressing the“ENGINE START STOP” switch oncestarts the engine. (For starting tips, see“How to start the engine” on page 296in Section 3.)

If the amber indicator light on the“ENGINE START STOP” switch blinks, thisindicates a malfunction of the push startsystem. Turn off the engine immediatelyand contact your Toyota dealer.

Approximately five hours after the engineis turned off, you may hear sound comingfrom underneath the luggage compartmentfor several minutes. This is normal opera-tion and does not indicate a malfunction.(See “Leak detection pump” on page viii.)

It is not a malfunction if the needle on allmeters and gauges move slightly when theignition switch is set at ACC, ON or whenthe engine starts.

NOTICE

Do not leave the ignition switch atON if the engine is not running. Thebattery will discharge and the ignitioncould be damaged.

When the battery is disconnected orrun down, the push button start functionmemorizes the current mode. After youreconnect, replace, or recharge the bat-tery, the memorized mode is selected au-tomatically. In any of these cases, turn offthe engine if the engine comes on.


161

Your automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed (with the ignitionswitch is set at ON).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on theinstrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting andkey removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (shifting into overdrive)

Sequential position: “S” mode driving

+: Upshift range

−: Downshift range

Automatic transmission

Shift with the brake pedaldepressed. (The ignition switch must beset at ON.)

Shift normally.

To select sequential position or“D”, lean the selector leverleftward or rightward.

“D” positionSequentialposition

Selector lever

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

162

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “Howto start the engine” on page 296 inSection 3. The transmission must be in“P” or “N”.

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fueleconomy and quieter driving. In this posi-tion, shifting into the overdrive gear ispossible. If the engine coolant temperatureis low, the transmission will not shift intothe overdrive gear even in the “D” posi-tion.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

(c) Driving in “S” mode

To select the “S” mode, put the selec-tor lever in the sequential position.

In the “S” mode, you can change theshift range position. The shift rangeposition can be switched between 5(fifth range) and 1 (first range) bypushing the selector lever forward to-wards “+” or pulling back towards “−”.When the selector lever is moved intothe “S” mode, the initial shift rangeposition is 4 (fourth range).

The “S” mode indicator light and the cur-rent shift range position are shown on theinstrument cluster.

1: Upshift range2: Downshift range


163

Shift range positions

� “5” (Fifth range):The most suitable gear is selected au-tomatically between first and overdrive(fifth) gears according to the vehiclespeed or driving conditions.

� “4” (Fourth range):The most suitable gear is selected au-tomatically between first and fourthgears according to the vehicle speedor driving conditions. Slight enginebraking will be obtained on a downhillroad. Smooth running with less shiftingwill be obtained on an uphill road.

� “3” (Third range):The most suitable gear is selected au-tomatically between first and thirdgears according to the vehicle speedor driving conditions. This range is tobe used when stronger engine brakingis necessary.

� “2” (Second range):First or second gear will be selectedautomatically according to the vehiclespeed or driving conditions. This rangeis to be used when engine brakingstronger than that of the “3” rangeposition is necessary.

� “1” (First range):The gear is fixed in first regardless ofvehicle speed or driving conditions.This range is to be used when maxi-mum engine braking is necessary.

If you attempt to downshift the transmis-sion when it is not possible to downshiftdue to high vehicle speed, a warning tonesounds twice.

Maximum allowable speeds

To get on a highway or to pass slowertraffic, maximum acceleration may be nec-essary. Make sure you observe the follow-ing maximum allowable speeds in eachrange:

range km/h (mph)1 59 (37)2 106 (66)3 165 (103)

NOTICE

Do not downshift if you are goingfaster than the maximum allowablespeed for the next lower range.

When the “S” mode indicator light doesnot come on even with the selector levermoved to the sequential position, theremay be a problem somewhere in thesystem. Have your vehicle checked/re-paired by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. In this case, you can drive inthe same condition as in the “D” position.

(d) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:

� When driving in the “D” position—Shift the selector lever to sequentialposition.

When driving in the “5” range withinthe sequential position—

Move the selector lever down to the“−” side to select the “4” range.

The transmission will downshift tofourth range and engine braking will beenabled.

Vehicles with cruise control or dynamiclaser cruise control—When the cruisecontrol is being used, engine brakingcan not be enabled because the cruisecontrol is not cancelled.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

164

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 176 or “Dy-namic laser cruise control” on page 179in this Section.

� Move the selector lever down to the“−” side to select the “3” range. Thetransmission will downshift to thirdrange when the vehicle speed dropsdown to or lower than 147 km/h (91mph), and stronger engine braking willbe enabled.

� Move the selector lever down to the“−” side to select the “2” range. Thetransmission will downshift to secondrange when the vehicle speed dropsdown to or lower than 91 km/h (56mph), and more powerful engine brak-ing than that of the “3” range positionwill be enabled.

� Move the selector lever down to the“−” side to select the “1” range. Thetransmission will downshift to firstrange when the vehicle speed dropsdown to or lower than 39 km/h (24mph), and maximum engine braking willbe enabled.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to skid orspin.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.


165

(g) Good driving practice

� If the transmission repeatedly shifts upand down between third gear and over-drive when climbing a gentle slope,shift the selector lever into sequentialposition.

� When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse overdrive.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or theparking brake to hold the vehicle onan upgrade. Do not attempt to holdthe vehicle using the accelerator ped-al, as this can cause the transmissionto overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift automatic transmissionselector lever” on page 331 in Section 4.

The traction control system automatical-ly helps prevent the spinning of frontwheels when the vehicle is started oraccelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition switch is set at ON, thesystem automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower against front wheels cannot bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which maycause the vehicle to lose tractioncontrol. In situations where the roadsurface is covered with ice or snow,your vehicle should be fitted withsnow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at an appropriate and cautiousspeed for the present road condi-tions.

Traction control system

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

166

NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during the ordi-nary driving so that it can operatewhen needed.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the trac-tion control system is in the self−checkmode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-ating, the following conditions occur:

� The system controls the spinning of thefront wheels. At this time, the slip indi-cator light blinks.

� You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system isfunctioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition switch is set atON. If the indicator light does not comeon when the ignition is turned on, contactyour Toyota dealer. “VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the traction control systemor the vehicle stability control system.


If the light comes on while driving, thesystem does not work. However, as con-ventional braking operates when applied,there is no problem to continue your driv-ing.


167


� The warning light does not come onafter the ignition switch is set at ON.

� The warning light remains on after theignition switch is set at ON.

� The warning light comes on while driv-ing.

The vehicle stability control systemhelps provide integrated control of thesystems such as anti−lock brake sys-tem, traction control, engine control,etc. This system automatically controlsthe brakes and engine to help preventthe vehicle from skidding when corner-ing on a slippery road surface or oper-ating steering wheel abruptly.

This system will activate when your ve-hicle speed reaches or exceeds 15 km/h(9 mph), and will deactivate when the ve-hicle speed reduces to below 15 km/h (9mph).

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the sys-tem is in the self−check mode but doesnot indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

� Do not rely excessively on the ve-hicle stability control system. Evenif the vehicle stability control sys-tem is operating, you must alwaysdrive carefully and attentively toavoid serious injury. Reckless driv-ing will result in an unexpected ac-cident. If the slip indicator lightflashes and an alarm sounds, spe-cial care should be taken whiledriving.

� Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacture, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use the tires otherthan specified, different type orsize, the vehicle stability controlsystem may not function correctly.When replacing the tires or wheels,contact your Toyota dealer. (See“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 363 in Section 7−2.)

� In situations where the road surfaceis covered with ice or snow, yourvehicle should be fitted with snowtires or tire chains.

Vehicle stability controlsystem

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

168

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-ing, the slip indicator light blinks and analarm sounds intermittently. Special careshould be taken while driving.

The slip indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition switch is set atON. If the indicator light does not comeon when the ignition is turned on, contactyour Toyota dealer.

“VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem or the traction control system.


If the light comes on while driving, thesystem does not work. However, as con-ventional braking operates when applied,there is no problem to continue your driv-ing.


� The warning light does not come onafter the ignition switch is set at ON.

� The warning light remains on after theignition switch is set at ON.

� The warning light comes on while driv-ing.


169

The tire pressure warning system warnsyou that the tire inflation pressure islow.

The tire pressure warning system is nota substitute for checking normal tire infla-tion pressure. Check the tire inflationpressure with a tire pressure gauge regu-larly.

CAUTION

The warning system may not activateimmediately if the tire bursts or sud-den air leakage should occur.

AI17008

The tire pressure warning light comes onwhen the ignition switch is set at ON andgoes off after a few seconds. This meansthe tire pressure warning light is operatingproperly. If the tire inflation pressure be-comes low, the light comes on again. Inthis case, adjusting the tire inflation pres-sure will turn off the light after a fewminutes. If the light comes on after blink-ing for 1 minute, the tire pressure warningsystem is not working properly.

Indicatorstatus

Meanings Do this

ON Tire inflationpressure islow

Adjust thetire inflationpressure

ON afterblinking for1 minute

Tire pres-sure warn-ing systemmalfunction

Have thesystemchecked atyour Toyotadealer

Tire pressure warning system

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

170

CAUTION

If the tire pressure warning lightcomes on, be sure to observe thefollowing precautions. Failure to doso could cause loss of vehicle controland result in death or serious injury.

� Stop your vehicle in a safe place assoon as possible. Adjust the tireinflation pressure immediately.

� If the tire pressure warning lightcomes on even after tire inflationpressure adjustment, it is probablethat you have a flat tire. Check thetires. If the tire is flat, change tothe spare tire and have the flat tirerepaired by the nearest Toyota deal-er.

� Avoid abrupt maneuvering and bra-king. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,you could lose control of the steer-ing wheel or the brakes.

The tire pressure warning light may turnon due to natural causes such as naturalair leaks or tire inflation pressure changescaused by temperature. In this case, ad-justing the tire inflation pressure will turnoff the light after a few minutes.

Pushing the tire pressure warning resetswitch should not turn off the tire pressurewarning light. Adjusting the tire inflationpressure will turn off the light.

The spare tire (except compact spare tire)is also equipped with the tire pressurewarning valve and transmitter. The tirepressure warning light will turn on if thetire inflation pressure of the spare tire islow. If a tire goes flat, even though theflat tire is replaced with the spare tire, thewarning light does not turn off. Replacethe spare tire with the repaired tire andadjust the proper tire inflation pressure.The tire pressure warning light will turn offafter a few minutes.

The compact spare tire is not equippedwith the tire pressure warning valve andtransmitter. If a tire goes flat, the warninglight will not turn off even though the flattire is replaced with the spare tire. Re-place the spare tire with the repaired tireand adjust the proper tire inflation pres-sure. The tire pressure warning light willturn off after a few minutes.

CAUTION

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label (tireand load information label). (If yourvehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label(tire and load information label), youshould determine the proper tire infla-tion pressure for those tires.)


171

As an added safety feature, your ve-hicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS–tire pressure warning system) that il-luminates a low tire pressure telltale(tire pressure warning light) when oneor more of your tires is significantlyunder−inflated. Accordingly, when thelow tire pressure telltale (tire pres-sure warning light) illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on a sig-nificantly under−inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under−inflation also re-duces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s han-dling and stopping ab ility.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pres-sure warning system) is not a substi-tute for proper tire maintenance, andit is the driver’s responsib ility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder−inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale (tirepressure warning light).

NOTICE

� Do not use liquid sealants for a flattire as tire pressure warning valveand transmitter will be damaged.

� When the tires must be repaired orreplaced, have them repaired or re-placed by the nearest Toyota dealeror an authorized tire dealer. Thetire pressure warning valves andtransmitters will be affected by theinstallation or removal of tires.

AI17009

IF THE TIRE PRESSURE WARNINGLIGHT COMES ON AFTER BLINKINGFOR 1 MINUTE...

If the tire pressure warning light comeson after blinking for 1 minute when theignition switch is set at ON, the tirepressure warning system is not workingproperly.

The system will be disabled in the follow-ing conditions:(When the condition becomes normal, thesystem will work properly.)

� If tires not equipped with tire pressurewarning valves and transmitters areused.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

172

� If the ID code on the tire pressurewarning valves and transmitters is notregistered.

� If electronic devices or facilities usingsimilar radio wave frequencies arenearby.

� If a radio set at similar frequencies isin use in the vehicle.

� If a window tint that affects the radiowave signals is installed.

� If there is a lot of snow or ice on thevehicle, in particular around the wheelsor wheel housings.

� If non−genuine Toyota wheels are used.

� If tire chains are used.

� If the spare tire (except compact sparetire) is in a location subject to poorradio wave signal reception.

� If the tire inflation pressure is morethan 500 kPa (5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar, 73psi).

If the tire pressure warning light comes onafter blinking for 1 minute frequently whenthe ignition switch is set at ON, have thesystem checked by your Toyota dealer.

Even if you use genuine wheels, the tirepressure warning system may not workproperly with some types of tires.

Pushing the tire pressure warning resetswitch should not turn off the tire pressurewarning light.


This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.


—Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

—Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.


173

—Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

—Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.



Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.

REPLACING TIRES AND WHEELS

When replacing the tires and wheels, besure to install tire pressure warning valvesand transmitters. ID codes on the tirepressure warning valves and transmittersare registered on the tire pressure warningECU. When replacing a tire pressurewarning valve and transmitter, it is neces-sary to register the ID code of tire pres-sure warning valve and transmitter. Havethe ID code registered by your Toyotadealer.

If the ID code is not registered, the sys-tem will not work properly. After about 1hour, the tire pressure warning lightcomes on after blinking for 1 minute toindicate a system malfunction.

NOTICE

When the tires or tire pressure warn-ing valves and transmitters must bereplaced, have them replaced by yourToyota dealer. The tire pressure warn-ing valves and transmitters will beaffected by the installation or removalof tires.

TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RESETSWITCH

When initializing the system, the presenttire inflation pressure is stored as stan-dard. The tire pressure warning systemdetermines decreased air pressure bycomparing the present and the standardtire inflation pressures. When you changethe set tire inflation pressure, it is neces-sary to initialize the tire pressure warningsystem.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

174

� When rotating the tires on vehicles dif-fering with front and rear tire inflationpressures.

� When changing the tire inflation pres-sure by changing traveling speed orload weight, etc.

� When changing the tire size.

To initialize the system, perform the fol-lowing:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place andturn the ignition switch off.

2. Adjust the pressure of all the installedtires to the specified cold tire inflationpressure level. (See “Tires” on page386 in Section 8.)

3. Set the ignition switch to ON.

4. Push and hold the tire pressure warn-ing reset switch until the tire pressurewarning light blinks slowly three times.

5. Wait for a few minutes with the ignitionswitch ON, and then turn the ignitionswitch off.

If you push the tire pressure reset switchwhile the vehicle is moving, initialization isnot performed.

If you push the tire pressure reset switchaccidentally and initialization is performed,adjust the tire inflation pressure to thespecified level and initialize the systemagain.

AI17009

If the tire pressure warning light does notblink slowly three times when you pushand hold the reset switch, initialization hasfailed and the tire pressure warning sys-tem may not work properly. In this case,initialize the system again. If initializationcannot be performed, have the systemchecked at your Toyota dealer.


175

CAUTION

Do not push the reset switch withoutfirst adjusting the tire inflation pres-sure to the specified level. Otherwise,the tire pressure warning light maynot come on even if the tire inflationpressure is low, or it may come onwhen the tire inflation pressure is ac-tually normal.

Type A

Type B

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brakepedal. For better holding power, first de-press the brake pedal and hold it whilesetting the parking brake.To release: Depress the parking brakepedal while depressing the brake pedal.

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

Parking brake

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

176

The cruise control allows you to cruisethe vehicle at a desired speed over 40km/h (25 mph) with your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintainedalthough a slight speed change may occurwhen driving up or down gradient, withinthe limits of engine performance. Onsteeper hills, a greater speed change willoccur so it is better to drive without thecruise control.

CAUTION

� To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) orwinding roads.

� Avoid vehicle speed increases whendriving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thecruise control set speed, cancel thecruise control then downshift thetransmission to use engine brakingto slow down.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

To operate the cruise control, press the“ON−OFF” button. This turns the systemon. The indicator light in the instrumentcluster shows that you can now set yourdesired cruising speed. Another push willturn the system completely off.

When the ignition switch is turned off, thesystem automatically turned off. To usethe cruise control again, press the “ON−OFF” button again to turn it on.

Cruise control


177

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging thecruise control, keep the “ON−OFF”button off when not using the cruisecontrol.

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

The transmission must be in the “D” posi-tion or the shift range position must be “4”(fourth range) or “5” (fifth range) in “S”mode before you set the cruise controlspeed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,or tap it down for a slower speed. Eachtap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

You can cancel the preset speed by:

a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL”direction.

b. Depressing the brake pedal.

c. Pressing the “ON−OFF” button.

If cancelled by c., the “CRUISE” indicatorlight goes off in the instrument panel. Inthis case, the present speed data iscleared, and you must set the speed fromthe beginning.

In the following cases, the preset speedautomatically cancels out:

a. When vehicle speed falls below about40 km/h (25 mph).

b. When vehicle stability control is acti-vated.

c. When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the preset speed.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

178

If cancelled by c., the present speed datais cleared, and you must set the speedfrom the beginning.

If the preset speed automatically cancelsout for other than the above reasons, donot operate the cruise control. Although itis no problem to continue driving, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.

When the difference between the actualvehicle speed and the set speed is lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed canbe increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each timeby pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”direction quickly within 0.5 seconds.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.

When the difference is 5 km/h (3 mph) ormore, the vehicle will cruise with itsactual speed. When the difference be-tween the actual vehicle speed and theset speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph),the set speed can be lowered 1.6 km/h (1mph) each time by pushing the lever downin the “− SET” direction quickly within 0.5seconds.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

Even if you downshift the transmissionfrom the “D” position or “5” (fifth range)to “4” (fourth range) in “S” mode with thecruise control on, engine braking will notbe enabled because the cruise control isnot cancelled. To decrease the vehiclespeed, reset to a slower speed with thecruise control lever or depress the brakepedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruisecontrol is cancelled.

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pullingthe control lever or by depressing thebrake pedal or by activating the vehiclestability control system, pushing the leverup in the “+ RES” direction will restorethe speed set prior to cancellation.

If the preset speed is cancelled when ve-hicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25mph), the preset speed will be resumedby pushing the control lever up in the “+RES” direction when vehicle speed ex-ceeds about 40 km/h (25 mph) again.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If “CRUISE” indicator light in the instru-ment cluster flashes when using thecruise control, press the “ON−OFF” buttonto turn the system off and then push itagain to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.

� The indicator light does not come on.

� The indicator light flashes again.

� The indicator light goes out after itcomes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.


179

Dynamic laser cruise control allows youto drive at a selected cruising speedover about 45 km/h (28 mph) with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal, maintain-ing an appropriate vehicle−to−vehicledistance.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on dynamiclaser cruise control in order to avoidserious injury or death, or to preventaccidents or to control the vehicle’sspeed in emergency situations. Donot use cruise control except in ap-propriate road and traffic conditions.Always drive carefully and attentively.Before using dynamic laser cruisecontrol, read and understand the fol-lowing instructions.

Steering wheel

Instrument cluster


2. Distance switch

3. “CRUISE” indicator light

4. “NORM.” indicator light (conventional cruise control modeindicator light)

5. Display

6. Master warning light

7. “READY” indicator light (ready mode indicator light)

Dynamic laser cruise control—

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

180

Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise controlmode

The dynamic laser cruise control func-tion has two cruise control modes.

� Vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode for maintaining an appropriatedistance between vehicles

� Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-trol mode for cruising at preset speeds

You can change the mode by using thecontrol lever.

The two cruise control modes function dif-ferently. If you use dynamic laser cruisecontrol, always confirm which mode is se-lected.

For the vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode, see “—Vehicle−to−vehicle distancecontrol mode” on page 180. For the con-ventional (fixed speed) cruise controlmode, see “—Conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode” on page 191.

The laser radar sensor in this systemprimarily detects the reflectors of thevehicle ahead of you to determine thepresence of the vehicle ahead as wellas measuring the vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance. The detection range of the sen-sor is about 120 m (400 ft.) ahead.

CAUTION

Dynamic laser cruise control is not acollision−avoidance system and willnot prevent accidents. Dynamic lasercruise control is a vehicle speed con-trol device that is intended for useonly on freeways or roads where thetraffic is light or moderate. To avoidserious injury, you must use cautionand be attentive to road and trafficconditions while using dynamic lasercruise control.

—Dynamic laser cruise controlmodes

—Vehicle−to−vehicle distancecontrol mode


181

DYNAMIC LASER CRUISE CONTROLOPERATIONS

The dynamic laser cruise control func-tion operates automatically and depend-ing on whether a vehicle is detectedahead may change the speed of yourvehicle as follows.

If no vehicle is running ahead of you—

1. Cruising at a fixed speed: If there isno vehicle detected ahead, yourcruising speed is maintained at thepreset speed from about 45 km/h (28mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph). Thepreset speed is displayed in thedisplay. For the vehicle speed setting,see “SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED”on page 185.

If a vehicle is detected ahead of you—

2. Deceleration cruising function: If aslower moving vehicle is detectedahead of you, your vehicle cruisingspeed decreases within the range ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) to about 135km/h (85 mph). The display shows thepreset speed, the detected vehicleahead and selected vehicle−to−vehicledistance. If your vehicle gets closer tothe vehicle ahead because of insuffi-cient automatic deceleration, then thealarm warns you to also manually ap-ply brakes.

3. Follow−up cruising function: After de-celeration, your vehicle cruising speedchanges in proportion to the speed ofthe vehicle ahead to maintain an ap-propriate distance from your vehicle tothe vehicle ahead. The vehicle−to−ve-hicle distance can be changed. For de-tails, see “CHANGING VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCE” on page 187.

4. Acceleration cruising function: If thevehicle ahead changes lanes, your ve-hicle cruising speed will be graduallyincreased up to the preset speed, andyour vehicle resumes fixed−speedcruising.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

182

This system operates by detecting pri-marily the reflectors of the vehicleahead. The distance may not be accu-rately or absolutely detected in the fol-lowing cases:

� The vehicle ahead has higher groundclearance, which means that theplacement of the reflectors is in ahigher position.

� The rear section of the vehicle aheadis extremely dirty.

� The vehicle ahead or other vehiclesaround you are flinging up water orsnow.

� Excessive exhaust gas (black smoke)is coming from the vehicle ahead orother vehicles around you, obscuringyour front view.

� There is an obstruction (protectivefilm, sticker, etc.) on the reflectorson the vehicle ahead, or reflectorsare not installed on the vehicleahead or are damaged.

� Heavy luggage in the luggagecompartment or rear seats is caus-ing the nose of your vehicle to tiltup.

CAUTION

To avoid accidents, always keep thelaser radar sensor glass clean andnever allow it to be covered withicicle or any substance, so it can de-tect the vehicle in front. (See “LASERRADAR SENSOR” on page 189.)

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on dynamiclaser cruise control. Observe the fol-lowing precautions in order to avoidserious injury or death:

� Under certain conditions where thevehicle in front slows drastically, oris stopped, the dynamic laser cruisecontrol will neither warn you nordecelerate. You must depress thebrake pedal to slow down, ensuringcollision avoidance or that suffi-cient vehicle−to−vehicle distance ismaintained.

� Do not use dynamic laser cruisecontrol in the following conditions:

In bad weather (such as rain, fog,snow, sandstorms or direct sun-light, or when raindrops or snow-flakes get on the laser radar sensorglass), the vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance will not be measured accura-tely.

When using the windshield wipersat high or low speeds the dynamiclaser radar cruise control turns off.


183

On roads with heavy traffic orsharp bends, an appropriate speedcannot be maintained and an acci-dent may occur.

On slippery road surfaces (icy orsnow−covered road surfaces), thetires will race and you will be un-able to control the vehicle.

When there is no vehicle detectedahead on steep downhill slopes, thepreset speed will be easily exceed-ed because of inefficient enginebraking. (In this case, automaticbraking will not work.) If there is avehicle detected ahead, the delay indeceleration timing could cause se-rious injury or death.

When the alarm sounds frequently(because acceleration or decelera-tion was repeated or sufficient ve-hicle−to−vehicle distance was notmaintained), an appropriate vehiclespeed cannot be attained and anaccident may occur.

On roads with steep and short in-clines and declines, failure to de-tect the vehicle ahead will shortenthe distance between your vehicleand the vehicle ahead and an acci-dent may occur.

� Deceleration cruising function andapproach warning do not operatewhen the vehicle ahead is at a stopor driving very slowly.

� If the vehicle ahead of you deceler-ates abruptly or if another vehiclecuts in ahead of you, your vehiclemay collide with the vehicle aheadunless you manually depress thebrake pedal to slow down your ve-hicle.

� Depending on the road configura-tion (curved, left and right continu-ous curved, the start or end of acurve, or narrow driving lanes dueto road construction) or your ve-hicle condition (steering wheel ma-neuvering, position in the lane, orunstable driving because of an acci-dent or breakdown), vehicles in oth-er lanes or surrounding objectsmay be detected, resulting in a con-trol failure or the approach warningactivation. This may also result ina very close distance between vehi-cles due to a failure to detect thevehicle ahead.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

184

Dynamic laser cruise control should notbe used in circumstances which are inap-propriate for any cruise control, such asentering free way on−ramps or off−ramps.

CAUTION

� Do not use dynamic laser cruisecontrol when exiting from or whenentering or merging onto a freeway.When you are following a slowermoving vehicle and exiting, the sen-sor does not detect the vehicle andwill accelerate to the preset speed.

� If other vehicles are driving outsideof the laser radar detection range,a delay in the detection of the ve-hicle cutting in at short range orfailure to detect a motorcycle run-ning on the side of the same lanewill occur. In this case, the dynamiclaser cruise control system will notfunction properly.

� When a slower vehicle in front ofyou leaves the lane, the dynamiclaser cruise control will no longerdetect a vehicle ahead and will at-tempt to accelerate the vehicle tothe faster preset speed.


To operate dynamic laser cruise control,press the “ON−OFF” button. This turns thesystem on. When the “CRUISE” and“READY” indicator lights in the instrumentcluster come on, you can now set yourdesired cruising speed and vehicle−to−ve-hicle distance. Pressing the “ON−OFF”button again will turn the system com-pletely off.

When the ignition is turned off, the systemis also automatically turned off. To usedynamic laser cruise control again, pressthe “ON−OFF” button again to turn it on.


185

When the ignition is turned off, all thepreset data is cleared. When you use thedynamic laser cruise control again, youneed to reset the data.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging thecruise control, keep the “ON−OFF”button off when not using the dynam-ic laser cruise control.

SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED

The transmission must be in the “D” posi-tion or the shift range position must be “4”(fourth range) or “5” (fifth range) in “S”mode before you set the cruise controlspeed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed. At this time, the displayindicates settings such as the preset ve-hicle speed, whether a vehicle is presentahead and selected vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance. If there is no vehicle detectedahead, the display does not indicate thevehicle ahead. You can now take your footoff the accelerator pedal.

If you need to accelerate—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe preset speed. When you release theaccelerator pedal, the vehicle will return tothe control prior to acceleration.

You cannot set a desired speed if themaster warning light comes on, the alarmsounds and the display indicates one ofthe warning codes “C1”, “C2” or “E3”. Ifany of the above codes appears on thedisplay, see “VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLEDISTANCE CONTROL MODE FAILUREWARNING” on page 190.


You can cancel the preset speed by doingany of the following:




If cancelled by a. or b., the “READY”indicator comes on and the dynamic lasercruise control enters the ready mode.

If cancelled by c., the “CRUISE” indicatorlight goes off in the instrument panel. Inthis case, the preset speed data iscleared, and you must set the speed fromthe beginning.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

186


a. When vehicle speed falls below about40 km/h (25 mph).

b. When vehicle stability control is acti-vated.

If cancelled by a. or b., the “READY”indicator comes on and the dynamic lasercruise control enters the ready mode.

If one of the warning codes “C1”, “C2” or“E3” appears on the display, the presetspeed automatically cancels out. See“VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING” onpage 190.

If the preset speed automatically cancelsout for other than the above reasons, donot operate the dynamic laser cruise con-trol. Although there is no problem to con-tinue driving, please contact your Toyotadealer.


Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. The displayed speed will in-crease in increments of 5 mph. Releasethe lever when the desired speed is attai-ned. The vehicle speed will gradually in-crease to the display speed.

CAUTION

When the vehicle−to−vehicle distancecontrol is on, your cruising speed isregulated in proportion to the speedof the vehicle ahead, so increasingthe preset speed using the controllever does not accelerate the vehicle.However, if the vehicle ahead leavesthe lane, your cruising speed will in-crease to the preset speed becausethe preset speed has been set higherusing the control lever. Confirm thesetting on the display.


Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and hold it. The displayed speed willdecrease in increments of 5 mph. Releasethe lever when the desired speed is attai-ned. The vehicle speed will gradually de-crease to the display speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

If the control lever is released when thevehicle speed exceeds the upper limit ofthe preset speed traveling downhill whileyou are pushing the lever down, the sys-tem will memorize the upper limit of thepreset speed as a preset speed.

Even if you downshift the transmissionfrom “D” position or “5” (fifth range) to “4”(fourth range) in “S” mode in the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode, enginebraking will not be enabled because thismode is not cancelled. To decrease thevehicle speed, reset to a slower speedwith the cruise control lever or depressthe brake pedal. If you use the brakepedal, cruise control is cancelled.


187


If the preset speed has been cancelled,when you push the lever up in the“+ RES” direction while the “READY” indi-cator in the instrument cluster comes onat a vehicle speed of more than 40 km/h(25 mph), the speed set prior to cancella-tion will be restored.

During follow−up cruising, if there are novehicles ahead because they havechanged lanes, your vehicle will accelerategradually up to the preset speed. At thistime, pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”direction will quickly speed up your ve-hicle in vehicle−to−vehicle distance controlmode.

CHANGING VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLEDISTANCE

You can select one of the following ve-hicle−to−vehicle distances.

1. LONG2. MIDDLE3. SHORT

Each time you push the distance switchbriefly, the setting changes from LONG toMIDDLE to SHORT and then back toLONG. You can confirm the setting on thedisplay.

Your vehicle speed changes in proportionto the speed of the vehicle ahead, main-taining the selected distance. However, ifthe vehicle ahead is slower, the selecteddistance will be shorter than the desig-nated distance.

When the vehicle−to−vehicle distance con-trol mode is activated or the “READY”indicator comes on, the vehicle−to−vehicledistance setting can be changed.

The vehicle−to−vehicle distance is alwaysset to LONG when the ignition switch isturned on.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

188

Select the vehicle−to−vehicle distance con-sidering traffic conditions. The approximatevehicle−to−vehicle distance based on timeinterval when driving at 88 km/h (55 mph)is shown below:

LONG about 75 m (245 ft.). . . . . . . . . . . MIDDLE about 50 m (165 ft.). . . . . . . . . . SHORT about 30 m (100 ft.). . . . . . . . . .

If the vehicle speed is slower than 88km/h (55 mph), the distance will be short-er than the above.

During long downhill driving, the vehicle−to−vehicle distance will be shorter thanthe selected distance. BRAKING CONTROL

Dynamic laser cruise control is not a colli-sion avoidance system. If the approachwarning is activated, depress the brakepedal to decelerate to ensure an appropri-ate vehicle−to−vehicle distance.

If you are getting closer to the vehicleahead at a relatively higher speed thanthat of the vehicle ahead or if enginebraking cannot be applied properly, brak-ing control is automatically activated. Atthis time, the display flashes.

Braking control is operating only when thevehicle−to−vehicle distance control modeis selected and your vehicle speed ex-ceeds about 40 km/h (25 mph). If thespeed decreases below about 40 km/h (25mph), braking control will cease, requiringthe manual application of brakes.

CAUTION

Braking control will not ensure thatyour vehicle will reduce speed ap-propriately. You must depress thebrake pedal to slow down, ensuringcollision avoidance or that sufficientvehicle−to−vehicle distance is main-tained.

APPROACH WARNING

While you are cruising in the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode, if the ve-hicle ahead decelerates abruptly or ifanother vehicle cuts in ahead of you, in-adequate braking will make your vehiclebecome closer to the vehicle ahead of youand the display will flash and beep.


189

CAUTION

� If the display flashes and beeps,you must depress the brake pedalto slow down to avoid a collisionor maintain sufficient vehicle−to−ve-hicle distance.

� In the following conditions, the ap-proach warning may not turn oneven if the vehicle drives closer tothe vehicle ahead, and an accidentmay occur:

Your vehicle and the vehicle aheadare cruising at almost the samespeed.

The vehicle ahead is cruising at afaster speed than yours. (The dis-tance between the vehicles will be-come longer.)

The vehicle ahead is at a stop ordriving very slowly. Pay specialattention to a very slow vehicle atthe end of the line in heavy trafficor at a tollgate.

The speed has just been set.

The accelerator pedal is depressedor has just been released.

LASER RADAR SENSOR

The laser radar sensor is used for ve-hicle−to−vehicle distance control cruis-ing.

If dirt is on the sensor glass, thedynamic laser cruise control function isautomatically cancelled and a warningcode appears on the display. (See“VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING”described below.)

However, if the glass sensor is coveredwith icicle or any substance, dirt maynot be detected.

Before driving in the vehicle−to−vehicledistance control mode, make sure theradar sensor glass is clean.

This product is a class I laser productcomplied with 21 C.F.R part 1040.10and 1040.11.

CAUTION

To ensure that dynamic laser cruisecontrol will function properly whiledriving, observe the following:

� Always keep the laser radar sensorglass clean. When cleaning, use asoft cloth and be careful not todamage the sensor.

� Avoid strong impacts around the la-ser radar sensor. An incorrect laserradar sensor alignment will result insystem malfunction. A special de-vice is required to adjust the laserradar sensor alignment. Be sure tohave the sensor adjusted by yourToyota dealer.

� Do not affix a sticker (including atransparent sticker) or attach an ac-cessory around the laser radar sen-sor.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

190

VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING

If there is trouble somewhere in the dy-namic laser cruise control while the ve-hicle−to−vehicle distance control mode ison, the master warning light comes onand the alarm sounds, and one of thewarning codes “C1”, “C2” or “E3” will ap-pear on the display. Dynamic laser cruisecontrol is automatically cancelled.

If “E3” appears on the display, the“CRUISE” indicator light in the instrumentcluster also flashes.

If “C1” appears on the display, the sys-tem cannot easily measure the vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of a dirty laserradar sensor glass while the dynamic la-ser cruise control is on.

If this code appears, clean the sensorglass with a soft cloth and try setting thepreset speed again. If the dirt is removedwithout cleaning, the system will automati-cally enter the ready mode.

If the system does not enter the readymode even after cleaning or the code re-mains on the display, the system might bemalfunctioning. Although there is no prob-lem to continue driving, please contactyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Always keep the sensor glass andnever allow it to be covered withicicle or any substance, so it can de-tect the vehicle in front.

If “C2” appears on the display, the sys-tem cannot easily measure the vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of the followingconditions:

� The wipers are operating at high or lowspeeds

� Direct sunlight from the front

� It is difficult to make a measurementbecause of bad weather (such as rainy,foggy, or snowy weather)

In the following cases, dynamic lasercruise control switches to the ready mode:

� The wipers are stopped or areswitched to intermittent operation.

� No direct sunlight from the front

In the above conditions, push the lever upin the “+ RES” direction and release it.Dynamic laser cruise control will be re-stored. If the setting operation cannot beperformed or if the warning code still ap-pears even after the weather clears, thesystem might have malfunctioned. Al-though there is no problem to continuedriving, please contact your Toyota dealer.


191

If “E3” appears on the display, a systemmalfunction has been detected.

If this code appears, stop your vehicle ina safe place, turn the ignition off, andthen restart it to reset the system. If thesetting still cannot be made or the samecode appears again, the system mighthave malfunctioned. Although there is noproblem to continue driving, please con-tact your Toyota dealer.

This mode allows you to cruise at adesired speed over about 40 km/h (25mph) with your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades within the limits of engineperformance, although a slight speedchange may occur when driving up ordown the grades. On steeper hills, agreater speed change will occur so it isbetter to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

� In the conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode, the approachwarning does not activate and noalarm will sound even if you aretoo close to the vehicle ahead, asneither the presence of the vehicleahead nor the vehicle−to−vehicledistance is detected. Pay specialattention to the distance betweenyour vehicle and the vehicle ahead.Always confirm the setting in thedisplay.

� Do not use the conventional (fixedspeed) mode in the following condi-tions, or serious injury or deathcould result:

To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use conven-tional cruise control mode when us-ing dynamic laser cruise controlwhile driving in heavy or varyingtraffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy orsnow−covered) or winding roads.

Avoid vehicle speed increasingwhen driving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thepreset speed in the conventionalcruise control mode, cancel theconventional cruise control modeand then downshift the transmis-sion to use engine braking to slowdown.

—Conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

192


To operate conventional cruise controlmode, press the “ON−OFF” button. Thisturns the system on. The “CRUISE” and“READY” indicator lights in the instrumentcluster comes on. Push the lever in the“MODE” direction for longer than 1 secondto change to conventional cruise controlmode. The indicator in the instrumentcluster is as shown. You can now setyour desired cruising speed. Pressing the“ON−OFF” button again will turn the sys-tem completely off.

However, once the vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance control mode activates and is used,it cannot be changed to the conventionalcruise control mode using the above op-eration. To change the mode, press the“ON−OFF” button to turn the system offand then press it again to turn it on. Nextpush the lever in the “MODE” direction forlonger than about 1 second.

To change to the vehicle−to−vehicle dis-tance control mode from the conventionalcruise control mode, push the lever in the“MODE” direction for longer than about 1second.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging thecruise control, keep the “ON−OFF”button off when not using dynamiclaser cruise control.

SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED

The transmission must be in the “D” posi-tion, “5” (fifth range) or “4” (fourth range)in “S” mode before you set the cruisecontrol speed in the conventional cruisecontrol mode.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed and the display shows thepreset speed. You can now take your footoff the accelerator pedal.


193

If you need to accelerate—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe preset speed. When you release theaccelerator pedal, the vehicle will return tothe speed set prior to acceleration.

You cannot set a desired speed if themaster warning light comes on, the alarmsounds and the display indicates thewarning code “E3”. If this code appearson the display, see“VEHICLE−TO−VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE FAILURE WARNING” onpage 190.


You can cancel the preset speed by doingany of the following:




If cancelled by c., the “CRUISE” indicatorlight goes off in the instrument panel. Inthis case, the preset speed data iscleared, and you must set the speed fromthe beginning.


a. When vehicle speed falls below about40km/h (25 mph).

b. When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the preset speed.

c. When vehicle stability control is acti-vated.

If cancelled by b., the preset speed datais cleared and you must set the speedfrom the beginning.

If the preset speed automatically cancelsout for other than the above reasons, donot operate the cruise control. Although itis no problem to continue driving, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.


Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.

When the difference between the actualvehicle speed and the set speed is lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed canbe increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each timeby pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”direction quickly within 0.6 seconds.



Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.

When the difference between the actualvehicle speed and the set speed is lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed canbe lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each timeby pushing the lever down in the “− SET”direction quickly within 0.6 seconds.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

194


Even if you downshift from “D” position or“5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range) in “S”mode in the conventional cruise controlmode, engine braking will not be enabledbecause this mode is not cancelled. Todecrease the vehicle’s speed, reset to aslower speed with the cruise control leveror depress the brake pedal. If you use thebrake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.


If the preset speed is cancelled by pullingthe lever, by depressing the brake pedalor by activating the vehicle stability con-trol system, pushing the lever up in the“+ RES” direction will restore the speedset prior to cancellation.

If the preset speed is cancelled when ve-hicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25mph), the preset speed will be resumedby pushing the control lever up in the “+RES” direction when vehicle speed ex-ceeds about 40 km/h (25 mph) again.

CONVENTIONAL CRUISE CONTROLMODE FAILURE WARNING

If there is trouble in the conventionalcruise control mode, the “CRUISE” indica-tor light in the instrument cluster flashes,the master warning light comes on andthe alarm sounds, the warning code “E3”will appear on the display.

If a system malfunction is detected whenthe conventional cruise control mode is inthe ready mode or operating, the masterwarning light comes on, an alarm soundsand the above code appears.

If this code appears, press the “ON−OFF”button to turn the system off and thenpush it again to turn it on. If the settingstill cannot be made or the same codeappears again, the system might havemalfunctioned. Although there is no prob-lem to continue driving, please contactyour Toyota dealer.


195

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAudio systemReference 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio remote controls 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio system operating hints 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For information about the speech command system of a vehicleequipped with navigation system, please refer to the separate“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

SECTION 1− 8

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

196

Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player(with cassette player controller)

Type 2: AM·FM radio/compact disc playerwith changer (with cassette player con-troller)

Type 3: AM·FM radio/compact disc playerwith changer (with cassette player andXM� satellite radio ∗ controller)

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�

tuner and service. Contact your Toyotadealer for details.

Reference


197

This section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.

Your audio system works when the ignitionswitch is set at ACC or ON.

OPENING THE AUDIO COVER

Push the button to open the audio cover.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off.

Push “AM”, “AM/SAT”∗, “FM”, “TAPE” or“DISC” to turn on that function withoutpushing “PWR·VOL”.

You can turn on each player by insertinga cassette tape or compact disc.

You can turn off each player by ejectingthe cassette tape or compact disc. If theaudio system was previously off, then theentire audio system will be turned offwhen you eject the cassette tape or com-pact disc. If another function was pre-viously playing, it will come on again.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “AM/SAT”∗, “FM”, “TAPE” or“DISC” if the system is already on but youwant to switch from one function to anoth-er.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


Using your audio system——Some basics

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

198

LISTENING TO THE XM� SATELLITERADIO BROADCAST ∗ (type 3)

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast inyour vehicle, an additional genuine Toyotasatellite receiver and antenna (or equiva-lents) must be purchased and installed. Asubscription to the XM� satellite radio ser-vice is also necessary.

How to subscribe to an XM � satelliteradio

An XM� satellite radio is a tuner designedexclusively to receive broadcasts providedunder a separate subscription. Availabilityis limited to the 48 contiguous states.

How to subscribe:You must enter into a separate serviceagreement with the XM� radio in order toreceive satellite broadcast programming inthe vehicle. Additional activation and ser-vice subscription fees apply that are notincluded in the purchase price of the ve-hicle and optional digital satellite tuner.For complete information on subscriptionrates and terms, or to subscribe to theXM� radio, visit XM� on the web atwww.xmradio.com or call an XM�’s Listen-er Care at (800) 967−2346. The XM� ra-dio is solely responsible for the quality,availability and content of the satellite ra-dio services provided, which are subjectto the terms and conditions of the XM�radio customer service agreement.

Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by tun-ing to “channel 000” on the radio. Fordetails, see “Displaying the radio ID” be-low.

All fees and programming are the respon-sibility of the XM� satellite radio and aresubject to change.

Satellite tuner technology notice: Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awardedType Approval Certificates from XM� Sat-ellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibilitywith the services offered by the XM� sat-ellite radio.

Displaying the radio ID

Each XM� tuner is identified with a uniqueradio ID. You will need the radio ID whenactivating XM� service or when reportinga problem.

If you select the “CH 000” using the“TUNE” knob, the ID code of 8 alphanu-meric characters appears. If you selectanother channel, display of the ID code iscanceled. The channel (000) alternates thedisplay between the radio ID and the spe-cific radio ID code.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�



199

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.

Type 1 and type 2 audio systems utilizeFOCUS� and TruBass� audio enhance-ment technologies, under license fromSRS Labs, Inc., in all mode except AMradio mode.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble, midrange (type 3 only), andbass levels. In fact, different kinds of mu-sic and vocal programs usually sound bet-ter with different mixes of treble, midrangeand bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has an antenna printed onthe inside of the rear window.

NOTICE

Putting a film (especially a conductiveor metallic film) on the rear wi ndowwill noticeably reduce the sensitivityof the radio.

YOUR AUDIO DISPLAY

The audio information is displayed on thecenter display.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

200

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

Push the button to open the cover for thecassette player.

When you insert a cassette, the exposedtape should face to the right.

Push the “ ” button to eject a cassette.

For instruction the player, see “—Controlsand features” described below.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the cassette player. Do notinsert anything other than cassettetapes into the slot.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up. The player will playfrom track 1 through to the end of thedisc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITHCHANGER (type 2 and 3)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”button and gently push the disc in withthe label side up. The player will playfrom track 1 through to the end of thedisc. Then it will play from track 1 of thenext disc.

The changer is intended for use with 12cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

� Do not stack up two discs for in-sertion, or it will cause damage tothe compact disc changer. Insertonly one compact disc into slot ata time.

� Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.


201

Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

—Controls and features�Type 1

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

202

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the buttonuntil you hear a beep—this will set thestation to the button. The preset buttonnumber will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The preset but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM and two FMfor each button. (The display will show“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you push“AM” or “FM” button.)

(Eject button)

This button is used to eject a compactdisc.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Cassette player

Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast−for-ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on

the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear onthe display.

To stop the tape while it is fast−forward-

ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stopthe tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”or “TAPE” button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassetteplayer will stop and then play that sameside. If a tape fast−forwards completely,the cassette will play the other side of thetape using the auto−reverse feature.

Compact disc player

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast−forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. The indicatorlight will come on and “AM” will appear onthe display.

AUDIO CONT (Tone and sound balanceadjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIO CONT”knob, the mode changes. To adjust thetone and balance, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compactdisc. The indicator light will come on.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.


203

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofseparate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Dolby � B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby� B Noise Reduction,push “ ” (preset button 1). “ ” will ap-pear on the display. Push the button againto turn off Dolby� B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used to re-cord the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

FM

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radioand select the FM band. The indicatorlight will come on and “FM1” or “FM2” willappear on the display. This system allowsyou to set twelve FM, two for each of thepreset button.

PROG (Program)

Push “PROG” (preset button 4) to selectthe other side of a cassette tape. Thedisplay indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”indicates the bottom side).

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast forwarding.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random)

Push “RAND” (preset button 3) to listenthe tracks on the disc in random order.“RAND” will appear on the display and theplayer will perform the tracks on the discyou are listening to in random order. Toturn off the random feature, push this but-ton again.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

204

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while thetrack is playing. “RPT” will appear on thedisplay. When the track ends, it will auto-matically rewind and replay. To turn off therepeat feature, push this button again.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while thetrack is playing. “RPT” will appear on thedisplay. When the track ends, it will auto-matically replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then move to thenext preset station. To stop scanning,push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upthe station band, stay there for 5 seconds,and then scan again to the next station.To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

Push the “SCAN” button to scan thetracks on a disc. “SCAN” will appear onthe display and the player will scan all thetracks on the disc you are listening to. Tostop scanning, push this button again. Ifthe player has scanned all the tracks onthe disc, it will stop scanning.

SEEK (Seeking)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find thestation after that.

Cassette player

Use this button to skip up or down tolocate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (in-cluding current one).

A blank space of at least 3 seconds isconsidered to be a start of a recording.

When the beginning of a tape is reached,the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, theplayer automatically reverses sides andresumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken word, live, or classicalrecordings.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TAPE

Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassettetape. The indicator light will come on.


205

TEXT

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

TRACK (Tracking up/down)

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “�” or “�” side of the “TRACK”button until the number of the track youwant to listen to appears on the display.If you want to return to the beginning ofthe current track, quickly push the downside of the button one time.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to stepup the frequency. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to step down the frequency.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

206

Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

�Type 2


207



To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The preset but-ton number will appear on the display.


This radio can store one AM and two FMfor each button. (The display will show“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you push“AM” or “FM” button.)

(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or allcompact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, pushand release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “�” or “�”side of the “� DISC �” button until thenumber of the disc you want to eject isdisplayed. Push and release the eject but-ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press andhold the eject button until you hear abeep. The last compact disc played beforepushing the button will be ejected first. Ifthe ejected disc is not removed for a longtime, the eject function will be cancelled.


Cassette player




ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”or “TAPE” button.


Compact disc player



AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. The indicatorlight will come on and “AM” will appear onthe display.







’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

208

DISC (Compact disc)



Error messages





“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.


“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.


� DISC �

Use the “� DISC �” button to select adisc you want to listen to.

Push “�” or “�” side of this button untilthe number of the disc you want to listento appears on the display.

Dolby � B NR∗



FM

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radioand select the FM band. The indicatorlight will come on and “FM1” or “FM2” willappear on the display. This system allowsyou to set twelve FM, two for each of thepreset button.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc player. Thisplayer can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button, then inserta compact disc. After the disc is loaded,the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push andhold the button (until you hear a beepwhen the audio system is on), then insertthe first compact disc. After the disc isloaded, the shutter of the slot will close.After a few seconds, the shutter will auto-matically open again so the next disc canbe inserted. The same process can beapplied for loading the rest of the discs.If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”will appear on the display.


209


PROG (Program)

Push “PROG” (preset button 4) to selectthe other side of a cassette tape. Thedisplay indicates which side is currentlyselected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”

indicates the bottom side).

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast−forwarding.



RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 3). “RAND” will appear on the dis-play and the player will perform the trackson the disc you are listening to in randomorder. To turn off the random feature, pushthis button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” and “RAND”will appear on the display and the playerwill perform all the tracks on all the discsin the magazine in random order. To turnoff the random feature, push this buttonagain.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player



Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing. “RPT”will appear on the display. When the trackends, it will automatically replay. To turnoff the repeat feature, push this buttonagain.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

210

Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” and “RPT” willappear on the display. The player will re-peat all the tracks on the disc you arelistening to. When the disc ends, the play-er will automatically go back to the firsttrack on the disc and replay. To turn offthe repeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio




Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan all the tracks onthe disc you are listening to. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer has scanned all the tracks on thedisc, it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push the “SCAN” button until you hear abeep. “ ” and “SCAN” will appear on thedisplay and the player will scan the firsttrack of the next disc. To stop scanning,push this button again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up ordown)

Radio



Cassette player








211

Compact disc player


Push “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push thedown side of the button one time.



TAPE


TEXT





TUNE (Tuning)


’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

212

Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

�Type 3


213



To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The preset but-ton number will appear on the display.


This radio can store one AM and two FMstations for each button. (The display willshow “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM/SAT” or “FM” button.)

XM� satellite radio∗—

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio channels.

To preset a channel to a button: Tune inthe desired channel. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe channel to the button. The preset but-ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset channel: Push the but-ton for the channel you want. The presetbutton number and channel number willappear on the display.

This radio can store three XM� channelsfor each button. (The display will show“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push“AM/SAT” button.)∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or allcompact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, pushand release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push either sideof the “DISC/TYPE” button until the num-ber of the disc you want to eject is dis-played. Push and release the eject button.

To eject all discs at a time, press andhold the eject button until you hear abeep. The last compact disc played beforepushing the button will be ejected first. Ifthe ejected disc is not removed for a longtime, the eject function will be cancelled.


Cassette player




ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stopthe tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”or “TAPE” button.


Compact disc player



’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

214

AM/SAT∗ (AM and Satellite radio)

Push the “AM/SAT” button to turn on theradio and select the AM band. The indica-tor light will come on and “AM” will appearon the display.

XM� satellite radio—

Push the “AM/SAT” button to turn on theradio and select the XM� band. “SAT1”,“SAT2” or “SAT3” will appear on the dis-play. This system allows you to set eigh-teen XM� channels, three for each of thepreset button.

Error messages

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,your audio system will display followingerror messages.

“ANTENNA”:

� The XM� antenna is not connected.Check whether the XM� antenna cableis attached securely.

� A short−circuit occurs in the antenna orthe surrounding antenna cable. See aToyota certified dealer.

“UPDATING”:

� You have not subscribed to the XM�satellite radio. The radio is being up-dated with the latest encryption code.Contact the XM� satellite radio for sub-scription information. When a contact iscanceled, you can choose the “CH000”and all free−to−air channels.

� The premium channel you selected isnot authorized. Wait for about 2 sec-onds until the radio returns to the pre-vious channel or “CH001”. If it doesnot change automatically, select anoth-er channel. If you want to listen to thepremium channel, contact the XM� sat-ellite radio.

“NO SIGNAL”: The XM� signal is tooweak at the current location. Wait untilyour vehicle reaches a location with astronger signal.

“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audioor program information. Wait until the unithas received the information.

“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected isnot broadcasting any programming. Selectanother channel.

“− − −”: The channel you selected is nolonger available. Wait for about 2 secondsuntil the radio returns to the previouschannel or “CH001”. If it does not changeautomatically, select another channel.

The XM� Listener Care Center is alsoavailable on the phone, please call (800)967−2346 during the following hours.

Monday—Saturday: 7 a.m.—1 a.m. Sunday: 12 p.m.—12 a.m.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�



215




MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.




SURROUND: Turn on or off the surroundfunction. “SURROUND ON” or“SURROUND OFF” on the display.

DISC (Compact disc)



Error messages





“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.


“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.


DISC/TYPE

Radio

When you push the “�” or “�” side ofthe “DISC/TYPE” button while receiving anRDS station, the current program type ap-pears on the display.

Each time you push “�” or “�” side ofthis button, the program type changes asin the following:

� NEWS

� SPORTS

� TALK

� POP

� ROCK

� JAZZ

� CLASSIC

� OTHERS

� INFORM (Information)

� EASY LIS (Easy listening)

� CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

� R&B (Rhythm and Blues)

� RELIGION

� ALERT (Emergency message)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

216

With the program type displayed, push the“SEEK/TRACK” or “SCAN” button. You canseek or scan for the station broad castingthe same type of program.


When you push the “�” or “�” side ofthe “DISC/TYPE” button while receiving aXM� channel, the current channel categoryappears on the display.

When the channel category appears, pusheither “�” or “�” side of this button toswitch to the next or previous category.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


Compact disc player

Use the “DISC/TYPE” button to select adisc you want to listen to.

Push “�” or “�” side of the “DISC/TYPE”button until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

Dolby � B NR∗



FM

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radioand select the FM band. The indicatorlight will come on and “FM1” or “FM2” willappear on the display. This system allowsyou to set twelve FM stations, two foreach of the preset button.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc player. Thisplayer can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button, then inserta compact disc. After the disc is loaded,the shutter of the slot will close.


To load multiple compact discs, push andhold the button (until you hear a beepwhen the audio system is on), then insertthe first compact disc. After the disc isloaded, the shutter of the slot will close.After a few seconds, the shutter will auto-matically open again so the next disc canbe inserted. The same process can beapplied for loading the rest of the discs.If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”will appear on the display.



217

PROG (Program)

Push “PROG” (preset button 4) to selectthe other side of a cassette tape. Thedisplay indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”indicates the bottom side).

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast−forwarding.



RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 3). “RAND” will appear on the dis-play and the player will perform the trackson the disc you are listening to in randomorder. To turn off the random feature, pushthis button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” and “RAND”will appear on the display and the playerwill perform all the tracks on all the discsin the magazine in random order. To turnoff the random feature, push this buttonagain.

RDS (Radio Data System) display

The radio will automatically switch to theRDS mode to receive an RDS stationwhile turned to FM broadcasts. “RDS” willappear on the display.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player



Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing. “RPT”will appear on the display. When the trackends, it will automatically replay. To turnoff the repeat feature, push this buttonagain.

Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” and “RPT” willappear on the display. The player will re-peat all the tracks on the disc you arelistening to. When the disc ends, the play-er will automatically go back to the firsttrack on the disc and replay. To turn offthe repeat feature, push this button again.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

218

SCAN

Radio





You can either scan the currently selectedchannel category or scan only the presetchannels for that band.

To scan the preset channels:Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on thedisplay. The radio will tune in the nextpreset channel up the band, stay there for5 seconds, and then move to the nextpreset channel. To stop scanning, pushthis button again.

To scan the currently selected channelcategory:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” appears on the display. Theradio will find the next channel in thesame channel category up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then scan again.To stop scanning, push this button again.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan all the tracks onthe disc you are listening to. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer scanned all the tracks on the disc,it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push the “SCAN” button until you hear abeep. “ ” and “SCAN” will appear on thedisplay and the player will scan the firsttrack on the next disc. To stop scanning,push this button again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.


219

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Tracking up ordown)

Radio




To select the next channel within the cur-rent channel category, push the “�” or“�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.Repeat until a desired channel is found.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


Cassette player







Compact disc player


Push “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push thedown side of the button one time.



TAPE


TEXT

Radio

This button is operational in RDS mode.

When an RDS station transmits a textmessage, “MSG” will appear on the dis-played.

To display the text message, first pushthe “TEXT” button to change the radiostation display. Then push the “TEXT” but-ton once more to display, and the mes-sage will appear on the display.

If the entire the message is not displayed,“ ” will appear on the display. To displaythe rest of the message, push and holdthe “TEXT” button until you hear a beep.

After the entire message has been dis-played, the message will disappear.

The message display will be canceled ifany button that affects the display ispushed.

If no messages are received, “NOMESSAGE” will appear on the display, andthe display returns to the previous mode.

The message display will be canceled ifyou activate any function that affects thedisplay.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

220

XM� satellite radio∗1—

When you push the “TEXT” button, thedisplay changes as follows: CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAMTITLE) → NAME (ARTISTNAME/FEATURE) → CH NUMBER → CHNAME

Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can bedisplayed. (Some information will not befully displayed.)

The message display will be canceled ifany button that affects the display ispushed.

If there is no song/program title or artistname/feature associated with the channelat that time, “− − − − −” will appear on thedisplay.

This XM� tuner supports “Audio Services”(Music and Talk) of only XM� satelliteradio and “Text Information”∗2 linked to therespective audio services.∗1: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


∗2: Text Information includes, ChannelName, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title andCategory Name.

Compact disc player





TRAF (Traffic)

This button turns the traffic announcement(TA) feature on and off. This button isoperational only in FM mode.

By pushing the “TRAF” button, “TRAFSEEK” will flash on the display and theradio will seek a traffic program station.

After the traffic announcement program isover, the display returns to the previousmode.

If no traffic program station is found, “NOTRAF INFO” appears on the display, andthe display returns to the previous modeand a beep sound.

To cancel the traffic announcement, pushthis button again.

TUNE (Tuning)



Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to stepup the channel. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to step down the channel.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�



221

Some parts of the audio system can beadjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.

1. Volume control switch

2. “��” switch

3. “MODE” switch

1. Volume control switch

Push “+” side to increase the volume. Thevolume continues to increase while theswitch is being pushed.

Push “−” side to decrease the volume.The volume continues to decrease whilethe switch is being pushed.

2. “ � �” switch

Radio

This switch has the following features—

To select a preset station:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch. Do this again to selectthe next preset station.

To seek a station:Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until you hear a beep. Do thisagain to find the next station. If you pushthe switch on either side during the seekmode, seeking will be cancelled.

To step up or down the frequency, pushand hold the switch even after you heara beep. When you release the switch, theradio will begin seeking up or down for astation. Do this again to find the nextstation.


To select a preset channel, push the “�”or “�” side of the switch. Repeat until adesired channel is found.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


Cassette player

This switch has the following features—

To skip up or down to a different track ineither direction:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch.






Audio remote controls(steering switches)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

222

To fast−forward or reverse:Push and hold the “�” side of the switchto fast−forward a cassette tape. “FF” willappear on the display. Push and hold the“�” side of the switch to rewind a tape.“REW” will appear on the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast−forward-ing, push the “�” side of the switch. Tostop the tape while it is rewinding, pushthe “�” side of the switch.


Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to adifferent track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch until the track you wantto listen to is set. If you want to returnto the beginning of the current track, pushthe “�” side of the switch once, quickly.

With compact disc changer only—

Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until the disc you want to listen tois set.

3. “MODE” switch

Push “MODE” switch to select an audiomode. Each push changes the mode se-quentially if the desired mode is ready touse.

To turn the audio system on, push the“MODE” switch.

To turn the audio system off, push andhold the “MODE” switch until the systemturns off.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio system op-erations:

� Be careful not to spill beveragesover the audio system.

� Do not put anything other than acassette tape or Compact Disc intothe slot.

� The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the au-dio system which you are listeningto. However, this does not indicatea malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. The farther you are from astation, the weaker its signal will be. Inaddition, reception conditions changeconstantly as your vehicle moves.

Audio system operating hints


223

Here are some common reception prob-lems that you may experience.

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere−especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

XM�∗

Alternation or modifications carried outwithout appropriate authorization may in-validate the user’s right to operate theequipment.∗: Use of satellite radio requires XM�


NOTICE

This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aclass B digital device, pursuant toPart 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim-its are designed to provide reasonableprotection against harmful interfer-ence in a residential installation. Thisequipment generates, uses and canradiate radio frequency energy and, ifnot installed and used in accordancewith the instructions, may causeharmful interference to radio commu-nications. However, there is no guar-antee that interference will not occurin a particular installation.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

224

If this equipment does cause harmfulinterference to radio or television re-ception, which can be determined byturning the equipment off and on, theuser is encouraged to try to correctthe interference by one or more ofthe following measures:

—Reorient or relocate the receivingantenna.

—Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

—Connect the equipment into an out-let on a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

—Consult the dealer or an experi-enced radio/TV technician for help.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYERAND TAPES

For the best performance for your cas-sette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regu-larly.

� A dirty tape head or tape path candecrease sound quality and tangle yourcassette tapes. The easiest way toclean them is by using a cleaning tape.(A wet type is recommended.)

Use high−quality cassettes.

� Low−quality cassette tapes can causemany problems, including poor sound,inconsistent playing speed, andconstant auto−reversing. They can alsoget stuck or tangled in the cassetteplayer.

� Do not use a cassette if it has beendamaged or tangled or if its label ispeeling off.

� Do not leave a cassette in the playerif you are not listening to it, especiallyif it is hot outside.

� Store cassettes in their cases and outof direct sunlight.

� Avoid using cassettes with a total play-ing time longer than 100 minutes (50minutes per side). The tape used inthese cassettes is thin and could getstuck or tangled in the cassette player.


225

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER AND DISCS

� Your compact disc player is intendedfor use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

� Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player from working.On hot days, use the air conditioningto cool the vehicle interior before youlisten to a disc.

� Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player skip.

� If moisture gets into your compact discplayer, you may not hear any soundeven though your compact disc playerappears to be working. Remove thedisc from the player and wait until itdries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisiblelaser beam which could cause hazard-ous radiation exposure if directedoutside the unit. Be sure to operatethe player correctly.

� Use only compact discs marked asshown above. The following productsmay not be playable on your compactdisc player.

Copy−protected CDCD−R (CD−Recordable)CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)CD−ROM

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

226

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

� Do not use special shaped, trans-parent/translucent, low quality or la-beled discs such as those shown inthe illustrations. The use of suchdiscs may damage the player orchanger, or it may be impossible toeject the disc.

� This system is not designed for useof dual discs. Do not use dualdiscs because it may cause damageto the player or changer.

Correct Wrong

� Handle compact discs carefully, espe-cially when you are inserting them.Hold them on the edge and do notbend them. Avoid getting fingerprintson them, particularly on the shiny side.

� Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold thedisc up to the light.)

� Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not listening tothem. Store them in their plastic casesaway from moisture, heat, and directsunlight.


227

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with asoft, lint−free cloth that has been damp-ened with water. Wipe in a straight linefrom the center to the edge of the disc(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventionalrecord cleaner or anti−static device.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

228


229

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAir conditioning systemControls 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climate remote controls 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel and rear vents 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning filter 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 9

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

230

1. Air conditioning display (withoutnavigation system)

2. Air conditioning display (For thenavigation system, see the separate“Navigation System Owner’s Manual.”)

3. Windshield air flow button

4. Temperature selector (“TEMP”)(with “DUAL” button indicatoron—individual setting on driver sideonly)(with “DUAL” button indicatoroff—simultaneous setting on driver,front passenger)

5. “AUTO” button

6. Temperature selector (“PASSENGERTEMP”)(individual setting on front passengerside only)

7. “OFF” button

8. “A/C” button

9. Air intake selector

10. “MODE” button (air flow selector)

11. Fan speed selector

12. “DUAL” button (temperature settingmode change)

Controls


231

“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-tioning, press the “AUTO” button. “AUTO”will appear on the display to show thatthe automatic operation mode has beenselected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed, air flow, air intake and on−off ofthe air conditioning according to the tem-perature.

When you press the “AUTO” button withthe air intake mode at FRESH, internalcirculation may be applied for maximumcooling.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

Fan speed selector

Push the “�” (increase) or “�” (decrease)side of the button to adjust the fan speed.

In automatic operation, you do not haveto adjust the fan speed unless you desireanother fan speed mode.

“DUAL” button

Push the button to change the mode ofthe temperature setting.

With the indicator on— Individual temper-ature setting for driver and front passen-gerWith the indicator off— Simultaneoustemperature setting for driver and frontpassenger

Temperature selectors

To increase the temperature, press the“�” side. To decrease it, press the “�”side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-mum cooling, and “HI” appears when youadjust to maximum warming.

—“TEMP” button

With the “DUAL” button indicator on—Thisbutton changes the temperature on thedriver side only.

With the “DUAL” button indicator off—Thisbutton changes the temperature on thedriver side and front passenger side si-multaneously.

This function will be cancelled when the“PASSENGER TEMP” button is pushed.

—“PASSENGER TEMP” button

This button changes the temperature onthe front passenger side only.

“OFF” button

Push the “OFF” button to turn off the airconditioning system.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

232

“MODE” button (air flow selector)

Push the “MODE” button to select thevents used for air flow.

In automatic operation, you do not haveto select the air flow unless you desireanother air flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from theinstrument panel vents and the rearvents.

2. Bi−level— Air flows from the floorvents, the instrument panel vents andthe rear vents.

When you set the temperature selectorsetting at about the middle in automaticoperation, warm air flows out of thefloor vents and relatively low−tempera-ture air flows out of the center andside vents.

3. Floor— Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield— Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “Air flow selector settings” describedbelow.

Windshield air flow button

When this button is pressed, air flowsmainly from the windshield vents andturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returnsthe air flow mode to the last one used.

In this position, the air intake selectormode changes to FRESH automatically toclean up the front view quickly. It is notpossible to return to RECIRCULATE inthis position.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “Air flow selector settings” describedbelow.


233

Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.The air intake mode which is being se-lected is shown on the display.

1. Recirculate— Recirculates the air insidethe vehicle.

2. Fresh— Draws outside air into the sys-tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

For example, when the ambient tempera-ture is low, the air intake mode maychange automatically to FRESH. This isnot a malfunction.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, thereis a problem in the air conditioning systemand the air conditioning automaticallyshuts off. If this happens, take your ve-hicle to your Toyota dealer for service.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

234

� To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except off.

Air flow selector settings Operating tips


235

� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

—For automatic operation

Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature— To the desired

temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—OFF

—For manual operation

Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards high temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning



Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature— To the desired

temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—ON


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards low temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

� For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

236

Ventilation



Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature— Towards low temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—OFF


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards low temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF

Defogging and defrosting

—The inside of the windshield



Temperature— Towards high temperatureto heat; low temperatureto cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperatureto cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.



� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

—The outside of the windshield



Temperature— Towards high temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards high temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defrosting function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.



237


� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

Some parts of the air conditioning systemcan be adjusted using the switches on thesteering wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.

1. Temperature selector (“TEMP”)(with “DUAL” button indicatoron—individual setting on driver sideonly)(with “DUAL” button indicatoroff—simultaneous setting on driver,front passenger)

2. “AUTO” button

3. “OFF” button

“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-tioning, press the “AUTO” button. “AUTO”will appear on the display to show thatthe automatic operation mode has beenselected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed, air flow, air intake and on−off ofthe air conditioning according to the tem-perature.

When you press the “AUTO” button withthe air intake mode at FRESH, internalcirculation may be applied for maximumcooling.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

Temperature selector

To increase the temperature, press the“�” side. To decrease it, press the “�”side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-mum cooling, and “HI” appears when youadjust to maximum warming.

With the “DUAL” button indicator on—Thisbutton changes the temperature on thedriver side only.

Climate remote controls(steering switches)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

238

With the “DUAL” button indicator off—Thisbutton changes the temperature on thedriver side and front passenger side si-multaneously.

This function will be cancelled when the“PASSENGER TEMP” button on the instru-ment panel is pushed.

“OFF” button

Push the “OFF” button to turn off the airconditioning system.

Side vents

Center vents

Rear vents

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents and rear vents.The instrument panel vents and rear ventsmay be opened or closed as shown.

Instrument panel and rearvents


239

The air conditioning filter informationlabel is placed as shown and indicatesthat a filter has been installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dustfrom entering the vehicle through the airconditioning vent.

This air conditioning system has a highefficient air refiner filter which helpseliminate dust and pollen, thereby in-creasing your driving comfort.

The air conditioning filter is set behindthe glove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-ter long use. The filter may need to becleaned or replaced if the air flow ofthe air conditioner and heater experi-ences extreme reductions in operatingefficiency, or if the windows begin tofog up easily.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,cleaning and replace the air conditioningfilter according to the maintenance sched-ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavytraffic flow, such as inner city or desertareas, early replacement may be required.(For scheduled maintenance information,please refer to the “Scheduled Mainte-nance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.)

Air conditioning filter——Checking and replacing theair conditioning filter

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

240

REMOVAL METHOD:

1. Open the glove box. Remove thescrew with a Phillips−head screw-driver and slide off the damper asshown.

2. Push in each side of the glove boxto disconnect the claws.

3. Remove the filter cover while push-ing in both ends of the cover.


241

4. Pull the filter out of the filter outlet. CLEANING METHOD:If the filter is dirty, clean by blowingcompressed air through the filter fromthe downward side.

Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm) from thefilter and blow for approximately 2 minutesat 500 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2 or bar, 72 psi).

If it is not available, have the filtercleaned by your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

When cleaning the filter, do not cleanthe filter with water.

REPLACEMENT METHOD:When inserting the filter in the filteroutlet, keep the “ ↑ UP” mark pointingup.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-erly in position. The use of air condi-tioning with the air filter removedmay cause deteriorated dustproof per-formance and then affect air condi-tioning performance.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

242


243

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOther equipmentCenter display 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cigarette lighter and ashtrays 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlets 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear console box 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holders 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear electric sunshade 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage box 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grocery bag hooks 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo net 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 10

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

244

1. Audio display

(For details, see “Audio system” onpage 195 in Section 1−8.)

2. Air conditioning display

(For details, see “Air conditioningsystem” on page 229 in Section 1−9.)

3. Pattern selector knob

4. Cruise information display

5. Outside temperature display

Center display—


245

Operate the center display with theignition switch on.

When the ignition switch is set at ON, thelast previously used mode displayed justbefore the ignition switch is turned off willappear.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the center display, thedisplay will automatically be set to theinitial mode.

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the displaymay be reduced.

Pattern selector knob

This knob is used to select the patternof the display.

Every time you push the pattern selectorknob, the display illuminates in the follow-ing order.

1. All the display

2. Audio display and air conditioning dis-play

3. Display off

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

—Before using the centerdisplay

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

246

The outside temperature value is updatedevery 1 second.

The displayed temperature ranges from−30�C (−22�F) up to 50�C (122�F).

If an abnormality exists in the connectionof the outside air temperature sensor,“−−”, “F” or “E” will appear on the display.If “−−”, “F” or “E” appears on the display,contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “−−”, “F” or “E”appears momentarily when the ignitionswitch is quickly set to ON. It is normalif it goes out soon.

1. Driving range(“FUEL RANGE”)

The distance the vehicle can travel withthe remaining fuel is calculated anddisplayed based on the quantity of re-maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The displayed value is updated every 10seconds.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, thedriving range calculation is automaticallyreset.

The actual driving range varies with driv-ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con-sumption is good, the driving range will belonger than indicated. If fuel consumptionis poor, the driving range will be shorterthan indicated.

2. Elapsed time(“TRIP TIME”)

The elapsed time after the engine startsis displayed.

When the engine is started, driving timeis counted from 0:00. Up to 99:59 (99hours, 59 minutes) can be displayed.When the driving time exceeds 99:59, thecounter returns to 0:00.

The calculation is reset when the ignitionswitch is turned off.

3. Average fuel consumption after re-fueling(“AVERAGE”)

Average fuel consumption after refuel-ing is calculated and displayed basedon total driving distance and total fuelconsumption with the engine running.

The displayed value is updated every 10seconds.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the av-erage fuel consumption after refueling cal-culation is automatically reset.

—Outside temperature display —Cruise information display


247

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

If quick adjustment to a full hour is de-sired, push the “:00” button.

For example, if the “:00” button is de-pressed when the time is between1:01—1:29, the time will change to 1:00.If the time is between 1:30—1:59, thetime will change to 2:00.


If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00 (oneo’clock).

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the time in-dication may be reduced.

The direction is indicated on the insiderear view mirror.

If the ignition switch was turned off withthe system on, the system will automati-cally turn back on when the ignition switchis turned on.

Push the “ ” switch to turn the com-pass system on and off.

Clock Compass

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

248

The compass indicates the directionthat the vehicle is heading. In theabove case, it shows that the vehicle isheading north.

Displays Directions

NNEE

SES

SWW

NW

NorthNortheast

EastSoutheast

SouthSouthwest

WestNorthwest

The compass may not show the correctdirection in the following conditions:

� The vehicle is stopped immediately af-ter turning.

� The compass does not adjust while thevehicle is stopped.

� The ignition switch is turned off imme-diately after turning.

� The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

� The vehicle is in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� The vehicle is magnetized. (There is amagnet or a metal object on or nearthe inside rear view mirror.)

� The battery has been disconnected.

If your vehicle is out of the set zone,refer to “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS”below to set the zone number.

If the deviation is small, the compassworks to calibrate the direction automati-cally while the vehicle is in motion.

For additional precision or for completecalibrating, see “CALIBRATING THECOMPASS” below.

The compass sensor is in the insiderear view mirror.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal objecton or near the inside rear view mirrorof the vehicle. Doing this may causemalfunction of the compass sensor.


249

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviationcalibration)

The direction display on the compassdeviates from the true direction deter-mined by the earth’s magnetic field. Theangle of deviation varies according to thegeographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,

then push and hold the “ ” switch untilthe zone number appears on the display.

Then push the “ ” switch, referring tothe following map to select the number ofthe zone where the vehicle is.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

250

Zone number

After calibration, leaving the system forseveral seconds returns it to the compassmode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8


251

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circlingcalibration)

Sometimes the direction display on thecompass may not change after a turn. Torectify this, stop the vehicle and push and

hold the “ ” switch until “C” appears onthe display.

If “C” appears on the display because ofa drastic change in the magnetic field,perform circling calibration.

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5mph) or less. If there is not enough spaceto drive in a circle, drive around theblock.

After driving 1 to 3 circles in the abovemethod, calibration is completed when thedirection is shown on the display.

If calibration cannot be performed becauseof the magnetized vehicle etc., take yourvehicle to Toyota dealer.

Perform circling calibration just afteryou have purchased your Toyota. Andthen always perform circling calibrationafter the battery has been removed, re-placed or disconnected.

� Do not perform circling calibration ofthe compass in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� During calibration, do not operate elec-tric systems (moon roof, power win-dows, etc.) as they may interfere withthe calibration.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

252

CAUTION

� When doing the circling calibration,be sure to secure a wide space,and watch out for people and ve-hicles in the neighborhood. Do notviolate any local traffic rules whileperforming circling calibration.

� Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Type A

Type B

CIGARETTE LIGHTER (type A)

To use the cigarette lighter, first openthe ashtray lid, then press in the light-er. After it finishes heating up, it auto-matically pops out ready for use.

If the engine is not running, the ignitionswitch must be set at ACC.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressedin.

Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter orequivalent for replacement.

ASHTRAY

Type A: To use the ashtray, push the lidto open.

Type B: Open the lid of the cup holderand set the ashtray in it. It can be usedoutside the vehicle. To use the ashtray,raise the lid.

When finished with your cigarette, thor-oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-vent other cigarette butts from catchingfire. After using the ashtray, close the lidcompletely.

To detach the ashtray, pull it out.

Cigarette lighter and ashtrays


253

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, always completely closethe ashtray after use.

Rear console box

Center auxiliary box

The power outlets are designed forpower supply for car accessories.

The ignition switch must be set at ACCor ON for the power outlet to be used.

NOTICE

� To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of 12V/120W.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlet longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting anything other than an ap-propriate plug that fits the outlet,or allowing any liquid to get intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

Power outlets

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

254

Indicator light

Buttons

The garage door opener ( �

Universal Transceiver) is manufacturedunder license from HomeLink � and canbe programmed to operate garagedoors, gates, entry doors, door locks,home lighting systems, and securitysystems, etc.

(a) Programming the HomeLink �

The HomeLink � in your vehicle has 3buttons and you can store one programfor each button.

To ensure correct programming into theHomeLink�, install a new battery in thehand−held transmitter prior to program-ming.

The battery side of the hand−held trans-mitter must be pointed away from theHomeLink� during the programming pro-cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedurein “Programming an entrance gate/Pro-gramming all devices in the Canadianmarket”.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink� buttonsyou want to program.

HomeLink�

Hand−heldgaragetransmitter

25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)

2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away fromthe surface of the HomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

Garage door opener


255

3. Simultaneously press and hold thehand−held garage transmitter buttonalong with the selected HomeLink� but-ton.

Do not release the buttons until step 4has been completed.

4. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.If programming a garage door opener,check to see if the garage door opensand closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden-tify if your garage transmitter is of the“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink� button. The ga-rage door has the rolling code feature ifthe indicator light (on the HomeLink�)flashes rapidly and then remains lit after2 seconds. If your garage transmitter isthe “Rolling Code” type, proceed to theheading “Programming a rolling code sys-tem”.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”equipped, it is necessary to followsteps 1 through 4 under the heading“Programming the HomeLink �” beforeproceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.The exact location and color of thebutton may vary by brand of garagedoor opener. Refer to the owner’sguide supplied by the garage dooropener manufacturer for the location ofthis “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 secondsin which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-grammed HomeLink� button twice. Thegarage door may open. If the doordoes open, the programming process iscomplete. If the door does not open,press and release the button a thirdtime. This third press and release willcomplete the programming process byopening the garage door.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

256

The ceiling mounted garage door openermotor should now recognize theHomeLink� unit and be able activate thegarage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/Program-ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink� but-tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand−held gate/devicetransmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)away from the surface of theHomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selectedHomeLink� button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)the hand−held gate/device transmitterbutton every 2 seconds until step 5 iscomplete.

5. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.Check to see if the gate/device oper-ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as homesecurity systems, home door locks orlighting, contact your authorized Toyotadealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink� buttons cannot beerased, however, to reprogram a singlebutton, follow the procedure “Programmingthe HomeLink�”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink �

To operate the HomeLink�, press theappropriate HomeLink� button to activatethe programmed device. The HomeLink�

indicator light should come on. TheHomeLink� continues to send the signalfor up to 20 seconds as long as thebutton is pressed.

(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink �

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codesat one time, press and hold down the 2outside buttons for 20 seconds until theindicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erasethe programs stored in the HomeLink�

memory.

For additional programming assistancewith your HomeLink � UniversalTransceiver call the:

� Toyota Customer Experience Center at1−800−331−4331 (U.S.A.)

� Toyota Canada Customer InteractionCentre at 1−888−869−6828 (Canada)


257

Refer to HomeLink� on the internet at:WWW.HOMELINK.COM

CAUTION

� When programming the HomeLink �

Universal Transceiver, you may beoperating a garage door or otherdevice. Make sure people and ob-jects are out of the way of the ga-rage door or other device to pre-vent potential harm or damage.

� Do not use this HomeLink � Univer-sal Transceiver with any garagedoor opener that lacks the safetystop and reverse feature as re-quired by federal safety standards.(This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.) A garage door open-er which cannot detect an object(signaling the door to stop and re-verse), does not meet current feder-al safety standards. Using a garagedoor opener without these featuresincreases risk of serious injury ordeath.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the ICRules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence that may be received, includinginterference that may cause undersiredoperation.

WARNING: This transmitter has beentested and complies with FCC and ICrules. Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate thedevice.

To use the glove box:

Open by pulling the lever.

Lock by inserting the master key (vehicleswith key cylinder−type ignition switch) ormechanical key (vehicles with smart keysystem) and turning it clockwise.

Unlock by inserting the master key (ve-hicles with key cylinder−type ignitionswitch) or mechanical key (vehicles withsmart key system) and turning it counter-clockwise.

With the instrument panel lights on, theglove box light will come on when theglove box is open.

Glove box

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

258

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

To use the auxiliary bo xes, open thelids as shown in the following illustra-tions.

CAUTION

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stop,always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

� Type A—It is designed for holdinga light objects, do not place anyheavy objects in it. Heavy objectsmay cause the holder to open andcontents to fly out resulting in inju-ries.

NOTICE

Type A—During hot weather, the inte-rior of the vehicle becomes very hot.Do not leave anything flammable ordeformable such as a lighter, glasses,etc. inside.

Type A (ceiling)

Type B (front console)

Auxiliary boxes


259

Type C (door panel)

Type D (center console)

Type E (rear seat)To access the rear console box, pull upthe lock release lever while raising therear console box lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the console box closedwhile driving.

Rear console box

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

260

It is possible to use the rear consolebox lid as an armrest by moving it asshown in the illustration.

When using the console box, return the lidto its original position.

Type A (center console)

Type B (rear armrest) Type C (rear armrest)

Cup holders


261

The cup holders are designed for hold-ing cups or drink−cans securely.

To use the cup holder, do the following.

Type A—Push on the lid.

Type B—Pull down the rear armrest.

Type C—Pull down the rear armrest andopen the lid on the armrest.

CAUTION

� Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink−cans on the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly injure people in thevehicle during sudden braking or inan accident.

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, keep the cup holderclosed when it is not in use.

To raise the rear electric sunshade,push the switch. To lower the sun-shade, push the switch again.

The sunshade works when the ignitionswitch is set at ON.

When the selector lever is shifted intothe “R” position while the sunshade israised, the sunshade will be automati-cally lowered. To raise the sunshade,move the selector lever out of “R”position and push the switch.

CAUTION

� Do not touch the brackets fasteningthe sunshade to avoid injuring yourfingers or hands.

� Do not put your fingers in the sun-shade groove while the sunshade isoperating to avoid getting themcaught or injured by the runner.

Rear electric sunshade

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

262

NOTICE

� To prevent the vehicle battery frombeing discharged, always operatethe sunshade while the engine isrunning.

� Observe the following to avoid dam-age and/or malfunction:

Do not overload the sunshade mo-tor and other parts (for instance bypushing down on the sunshadebracket while it is opening).

Do not place anything where theymay hinder the opening/closing ofthe sunshade.

Do not affix anything to the sun-shade.

Clean the sunshade groove if thereis any foreign matter or dust on it.

Do not operate the rear electricsunshade repeatedly for a long timeas its motor may overheat.

This box is designed to hold things likebottles.

This hook is designed to hang thingslike grocery bags.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, avoidhanging heavy loads on it.

Storage box Grocery bag hooks


263

To secure belongings, hang the cargonet on the hooks.

NOTICE

� Do not use the net to secure sharpor heavy objects. The net will tearoff.

� Be sure not to twist the net whenhooking.

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have2 holes, then they are designed for usewith 2 locking clips. Attach the floor matto the vehicle carpet using the clips. Lockthe clips into the holes in the vehiclecarpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the vehicle carpet. If thefloor mat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.

Cargo net Floor mat

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

264


265

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOURTOYOTAInformation before driving your toyotaBreak−in period 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three−way catalytic converters 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridium−tipped spark plugs 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle load limits 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo and luggage 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

266

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak−in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

� Avoid full throttle acceleration whenstarting and driving.

� Avoid racing the engine.

� Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

� Do not drive for a long time at anysingle speed, either fast or slow.

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.

OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Oc-tane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating or research octane number lowerthan stated above will cause persistentheavy knocking. If it is severe, this willlead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is normaland there is no need for concern.

Break−in period Fuel


267

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contains detergent additives toavoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of four categoriesthat depend on required emission lev-els. In the U.S., category 4 has beenadopted. The WWFC improves air quali-ty by providing for better emissions invehicle fleets, and customer satisfactionthrough better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in yourToyota, be sure that it has an octanerating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If this doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

268

NOTICE

� Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

� If driveab ility problems are encoun-tered (poor hot starting, vaporizing,engine knock, etc.), discontinue theuse.

� Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-plying fuel to the engine to minimize therisk of fuel leakage when the engine stallsor an airbag inflates upon collision. Torestart the engine after the fuel pump shutoff system activates, set the ignitionswitch to ACC or off once and start it.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehiclebefore restarting the engine. If youfind that fuel has leaked onto theground, the fuel system has beendamaged and is in need of repair. Inthis case, do not restart the engine.

If you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries


269

The three−way catalytic converters areemission control devices installed inthe exhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

� Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

� Do not drive, idle or park your ve-hicle over anything that might burneasily such as grass, leaves, paperor rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three−way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

� Use only unleaded gasoline.

� Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three−way catalytic converter.

� Do not allow the engine to run atidle speed for more than 20 min-utes.

� Avoid racing the engine.

� Do not push−start or pull−start yourvehicle.

� Do not turn off the ignition whilethe vehicle is moving.

� Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel system could cause an ex-tremely high three−way catalyticconverter temperature.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check−up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree−way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

� To ensure that the three−way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

Three−way catalytic converters

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

270

CAUTION

� Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

� Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

� Do not run the engine in a garageor enclosed area except for thetime needed to drive the vehicle inor out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

� Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the engine run-ning. If it is unavoidable, however,do so only in an unconfined areaand adjust the heating or coolingsystem to force outside air into thevehicle.

� Keep the trunk lid closed whiledriving. An open or unsealed trunklid may cause exhaust gases to bedrawn into the vehicle.

� To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

� If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, open the windows andclose the trunk lid to ensure plentyof fresh air enters the vehicle. Ifyou can smell exhaust fumes eventhough there are no other vehiclesin the surrounding area, have yourvehicle checked by your Toyotadealer. Continued inhalation of ex-haust fumes can lead to death bygas poisoning.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

� Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

Engine exhaust cautionsFacts about engine oilconsumption


271

� Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note the that oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 356 in Section 7−2.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

272

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tippedspark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only Toyota genuine iridium−tipped spark plugs and do not adjustgaps for your engine performance andsmooth driveab ility.

For details about the spark plug type, see“Service specifications” on page 383 inSection 8.

The tandem master cylinder brake systemis a hydraulic system with two separatesub−systems. If either sub−system shouldfail, the other will still work. However, thepedal will be harder to press, and yourstopping distance will increase. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only asingle brake system. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses engine vacuum topower−assist the brakes. If the engineshould quit while you are driving, you canbring the vehicle to a stop with normalpedal pressure. There is enough reservedvacuum for one or two stops—but nomore!

CAUTION

� Do not pump the brake pedal if theengine stalls. Each push on thepedal uses up your reserved vacu-um.

� Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willincrease.

Iridium−tipped spark plugs Brake system


273

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

The anti−lock brake system is designedto automatically help prevent lock−up ofthe wheels during a sudden braking orbraking on slippery road surfaces. Thisassists in providing directional stab ilityand steering performance of the vehicleunder these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the anti−lock brake systemfunction is in action, you may feel thebrake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.In this situation, to let the anti−lockbrake system work for you, just hold thebrake pedal down more firmly. Do notpump the brake in a panic stop. Thiswill result in reduced braking performan-ce.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-erative after the vehicle has acceleratedto a speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on a manhole cov-er, a steel plate at a construction site,joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy daytends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound inthe engine compartment for a few secondswhen the engine is started or just afterthe vehicle is started. This means that theanti−lock brake system is in the selfcheck mode, and does not indicate a mal-function.

When the anti−lock brake system is ac-tivated, the following conditions mayoccur. They do not indicate a malfunc-tion of the system:

� You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-tem operating and feel the brake pedalpulsating and the vibrations of the ve-hicle body and steering wheel. Youmay also hear the motor sound in theengine compartment even after the ve-hicle is stopped.

� At the end of the anti−lock brake sys-tem activation, the brake pedal maymove a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lockbrake system: Although the anti−lockbrake system assists in providing ve-hicle control, it is still important todrive with all due care and maintaina moderate speed and safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you, be-cause there are limits to the vehiclestability and effectiveness of steeringwheel operation even with the anti−lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti−lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

274

Anti−lock brake system is not de-signed to shorten the stopping dis-tance: Always drive at a moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you.Compared with vehicles without ananti−lock brake system, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:

� Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.

� Driving with tire chains installed.

� Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road.

� Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size atappropriate pressure: The anti−lockbrake system detects vehicle speedsusing the speed sensors for respec-tive wheels’ turning speeds. The useof tires other than specified may failto detect the accurate turning speedresulting in a longer stopping dis-tance.

Type A

Type B

“ABS” warning light

Vehicles without the vehicle stab ilitycontrol system—

The light comes on when the ignitionswitch is set at ON. If the anti−lock brakesystem works properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if thesystem malfunctions, the light comes onagain.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.



275

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the components moni-tored by the warning light system. Con-tact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition switch is set at ON, or remainson.



CAUTION



Vehicles with the vehicle stability con-trol system—

The light comes on when the ignitionswitch is set at ON. If the anti−lock brakesystem and the brake assist system workproperly, the light turns off after a fewseconds. Thereafter, if either of the sys-tems malfunctions, the light comes onagain.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system and the brake as-sist system do not operate, but the brakesystem still operates conventionally.



� The light does not come on when theignition switch is set at ON, or remainson.



CAUTION



’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

276

DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKESYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc typeparking brake system. This type of brakesystem needs bedding−down of the brakeshoes periodically or whenever the parkingbrake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-ding−down.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (vehicles withvehicle stability control system)

When you slam the brakes on, thebrake assist system judges as an emer-gency stop and provides more powerfulbraking for a driver who cannot holddown the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-erful braking will be applied. At this time,you may hear a sound in the enginecompartment and feel the vibration of thebrake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-function.

The brake assist system becomes opera-tive after the vehicle has accelerated toa speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-ing light, see “Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers” on page 145 in Sec-tion 1−6.

The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

Brake pad wear limitindicators


277

The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Label.

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown.

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identificationnumber —Engine number

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

278

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 47mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of control.

Theft prevention labels(except for Canada) Suspension and chassis


279

This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. Tire size— For details, see “—Tire

size” on page 283.2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)— For details, see“—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)” on page 282.

3. Location of the tread wear indi-cators— For details, see “Check-ing and replacing tires” on page363.

4. Uniform tire quality grading—For details, see “—Uniform tirequality grading” on page 284.

5. Tire ply composition and mate-rials— Plies mean a layer of rub-ber−coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires— Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

Tire information——Tire symbols (standard tire)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

280

7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”— A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

8. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure— For details,see “Vehicle load limits” on page289 and “Tires” on page 386.

9. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure— This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For details about recom-mended cold tire inflationpressure, see “Tires” on page 386.

10.Summer tire or all seasontire— An all season tire has “M+S”on the sidewall. The tire notmarked with “M+S” is a summertire. For details, see “Types oftires” on page 292.


281

This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”— A

compact spare tire is identified bythe phrase “TEMPORARY USEONLY” molded into its sidewall.This tire is designed for temporaryemergency use only. For details,see “Compact spare tire” on page321.

2. Tire size— For details, see “—Tiresize” on page 283.

3. DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)— For details, see“—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)” on page 282.

4. Location of the tread wear indi-cators— For details, see “Check-ing and replacing tires” on page363.

5. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure— For details,see “Vehicle load limits” on page289 and “Tires” on page 386.

—Tire symbols (compact spare tire)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

282

6. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure— This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For details about recom-mended cold tire inflationpressure, see “Tires” on page 386.

7. Tire ply composition and mate-rials— Plies mean a layer of rub-ber−coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

8. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”— A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

9. Radial tires or bias−ply tires— Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

This illustration indicates typical DOTand Tire Identification Number (TIN).1. “DOT” symbol2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)3. Tire manufacturer ’s identification

mark4. Tire size code5. Manufacturer ’s optional tire type

code (3 or 4 letters)6. Manufacturing week7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that thetire conforms to applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)


283

This illustration indicates typical tiresize.1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)2. Section width (in millimeters)3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)5. Wheel diameter (in inches)6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

1. Section width2. Tire height3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead2. Sidewall3. Shoulder4. Tread5. Belt6. Inner liner7. Reinforcing rubber8. Carcass9. Rim lines10.Bead wires11. Chafer

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

284

This information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic Safe-ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation. It providesthe purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-formation on uniform tire quality grad-ing.Your Toyota dealer will help answerany questions you may have as youread this information.DOT quality grades—All passengervehicle tires must conform to Fed-eral Safety Requirements in addi-tion to these grades. Qualitygrades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall betweentread shoulder and maximum sec-tion width. For example: Treadwear200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear— The treadwear grade isa comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested un-der controlled conditions on a speci-fied government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wearone and a half (1−1/2) times as wellon the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving hab-its, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C— The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, and they representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor trac-tion performance.Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking(straight ahead) traction tests anddoes not include cornering (turning)traction.

—Uniform tire quality grading


285

Temperature A, B, C— The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No.109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.Warning: The temperature grades forthis tire are established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either sep-arately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

286

Tire related term Meaning

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may bereplaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these itemsare available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Cold tire inflation pressuretire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mileunder that condition

Curb weightthe weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, airconditioning and additional weight optional engine

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and itis shown on the sidewall of the tire

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—(a) curb weight;(b) accessory weight;(c) vehicle capacity weight; and(d) production options weight

—Glossary of tire terminology


287


Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the secondcolumn of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighingover 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, includingheavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and specialtrim

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beadsare seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer ’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-nated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

288


Vehicle normal load on the tirethe load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity,number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number ofoccupants

Occupant distribution in a normallyloaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat


289

Vehicle load limits include total loadcapacity, seating capacity, towing ca-pacity and cargo capacity. Follow theload limits shown below. Total load ca-pacity and seating capacity are alsodescribed on the tire and loading in-formation label. For location of the tireand loading information label, see“Checking tire inflation pressure” onpage 361.Total load capacity:

395 kg (870 lb.)Total load capacity means com-bined weight of occupants, cargoand luggage. Tongue load is in-cluded when trailer towing.

Seating capacity:Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)Seating capacity means the maxi-mum number of occupants whoseestimated average weight is 68 kg(150 lb.) per person. Depending onthe weight of each person, the seat-ing capacity given may exceed thetotal load capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupants arewithin the seating capacity, do not ex-ceed the total load capacity.

Towing capacity: 454 kg (1000 lb.)Towing capacity means the maxi-mum gross trailer weight (trailerweight plus its cargo weight) thatyour vehicle is able to tow.

Cargo capacityCargo capacity may increase or de-crease depending on the size (weight)and the number of occupants. For de-tails, see “—Capacity and distribu-tion” that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more thaneach load limit. That may causenot only damage to the tires, butalso deterioration to the steeringability and braking ability, whichmay cause an accident.

Vehicle load limits

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

290

When stowing cargo and luggage inthe vehicle, observe the following:� Put cargo and luggage in the trunk

when at all possible. Be sure allitems are secured in place.

� Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as farforward as possible helps maintainbalance.

� For better fuel economy, do notcarry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

� Do not place anything on thepackage tray behind the rearseatback. Such items may bethrown about and possibly in-jure people in the vehicle dur-ing sudden braking or an acci-dent.

� Do not drive with objects lefton top of the instrument panel.They may interfere with thedriver’s field of view. Or theymay move during sharp vehicleacceleration or turning, and im-pair the driver’s control of thevehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occu-pants.

Cargo capacity depends on the to-tal weight of the occupants.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) – (Total weight of occupants)Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit—(1) Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’splacard.

(2) Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

Cargo and luggage——Stowage precautions —Capacity and distribution


291

(4) The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For exam-ple, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lb passengers in your ve-hicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacityis 650 lbs. (1400–750(5x150)=650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo beingloaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacityof your vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, seepage 306.

Cargocapacity

Total loadcapacity

Example on Your VehicleIn case that 2 people with the com-bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) areriding in your vehicle with the totalload capacity of 395 kg (870 lb.), theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity will be as follows:

395 kg – 166 kg = 229 kg(870 lb. – 366 lb. = 504 lb.)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

292

From this condition, if 3 more passen-gers with the combined weight of 176kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-go and luggage load will be reducedas follows:

229 kg – 176 kg = 53 kg(504 lb. – 388 lb. = 116 lb.)

As shown in the above example, if thenumber of occupants increases, thecargo and luggage load equaling thecombined weight of occupants whogot on later must be reduced. In otherwords, if the increase in the numberof occupants causes the excess ofthe total load capacity (combinedweight of occupants plus cargo andluggage load), you have to reduce thecargo and luggage on your vehicle.For details about total load capacity,see “Vehicle load limits” on page 289.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-pant’s weight and the cargo loadis less than the total load capac-ity, do not apply the load uneven-ly. That may cause not only dam-age to the tire but also deteriora-tion to the steering ability due tounbalance of the vehicle, causingan accident.

Determine what kind of tires yourvehicle is originally equipped with.1. Summer tiresSummer tires are high−speed capabil-ity tires best suited to highway drivingunder dry conditions.Since summer tires do not have thesame traction performance as snowtires, summer tires are inadequate fordriving on snow−covered or icy roads.For driving on snow−covered or icyroads, we recommend using snowtires. If installing snow tires, be sureto replace all four tires.2. All season tiresAll season tires are designed to pro-vide better traction in snow and to beadequate for driving in most winterconditions, as well as for use all yearround.

Types of tires


293

All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performancecompared with snow tires in heavy orloose snow. Also, all season tires fallshort in acceleration and handlingperformance compared with summertires in highway driving.The details about how to distinguishsummer tires from all season tires aredescribed on page 279 in this Section.

CAUTION

� Do not mix summer and all sea-son tires on your vehicle asthis can cause dangerous han-dling characteristics, resultingin loss of control.

� Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s designatedtires, and never mix tires orwheels of the sizes differentfrom the originals.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

294


295

STARTING AND DRIVINGStarting and drivingBefore starting the engine 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving and parking using smart key system 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 306. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 311. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

296

1. Check the area around the vehicle be-fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,seat cushion angle, seat cushionlength, head restraint height, steeringwheel angle and length.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all the doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

With smart key system only—

Once you press “ENGINE START STOP”switch (engine switch) and release it, thecranking hold function continues to crankthe engine until it starts.

The function stops cranking the engineafter about 25 seconds maximum if theengine has not started yet. When youcrank the engine again, wait a few sec-onds and restart it.

If you press and hold the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch, the function willkeep cranking for about 30 seconds maxi-mum.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If youneed to restart the engine while thevehicle is moving, put the selector le-ver in “N”. A starter safety device willprevent the starter from operating if theselector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it tothe floor until driving off.

Before starting the engineHow to start the engine——Cranking hold function (a) Before cranking


297

Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system in yourengine automatically controls the properair−fuel mixture for starting. You can starta cold or hot engine as follows:

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,crank the engine by turning the key to“START” position. Release it when the en-gine starts.

Engine should be warmed up by driving,not in idle. For warming up, drive withsmoothly turning engine until engine cool-ant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page314 in Section 4.

NOTICE

� Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

� Do not race a cold engine.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, have theengine checked immediately.

PUSH BUTTON START FUNCTION

The engine can be started by pressing the“ENGINE START STOP” switch.

Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system in yourengine automatically controls the properair−fuel mixture for starting. You can starta cold or hot engine as follows:

(b) Starting the engine (with key cylinder−typeignition switch)

(b) Starting the engine (with smart key system)

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

298

When the key is in the vehicle (on yourperson), it is possible to start the engine.

With the brake pedal firmly depressed, theindicator light on the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch will turn green. Check thatthe automatic transmission selector leveris in the “P” position. Pressing the “EN-GINE START STOP” switch once startsthe engine.

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switchslowly and firmly.

Engine should be warmed up by driving,not in idle. For warming up, drive withsmoothly turning engine until engine cool-ant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

In the following cases, the engine will notstart.

� If a buzzer sounds from the vehicleand the smart key system warning lightcomes on when pressing the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch, this indicatesthat the key is not in the vehicle.

� If the key is placed in the trunk.

� There are instances in which the en-gine will not start, even if the key isin the vehicle (e.g. on the floor, in thecup holder or glove box).

When the push button start functiondoes not operate properly, the followingmay be causes:

� The key battery may be discharged ifthe electronic key does not work.

You can start the engine by touchingthe Toyota logo side of the electronickey to the “ENGINE START STOP”switch. For derails, see “Smart keysystem” on page 27 in Section 1−2.

Replace the key battery as soon aspossible. (See “—Replacing battery” onpage 25 in Section 1−2.)

� The engine was repeatedly turned onand off over a short period.

Wait 10 seconds and then start theengine.


299

� If the green indicator light on the“ENGINE START STOP” switch flashesand the smart key system warning lighton the instrument cluster comes on,the steering wheel is locked.

To free it, rock the steering wheelslightly while pressing the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch.

� If the amber indicator light on the“ENGINE START STOP” switch flashesand the smart key system warning lighton the instrument cluster comes on,there is a problem in the push buttonstart function or the steering lock func-tion.

Contact your Toyota dealer and haveyour vehicle and all keys inspected.

� In addition to the above, there areinstances in which the smart key sys-tem does not operate properly becauseof the circumstances of use. For de-tails, see “Smart key system” on page27 in Section 1−2.

In cases other than those describedabove, it is possible that a problem hasoccurred in an area other than the startsystem. See “If your vehicle will not start”on page 314 in Section 4.

When the battery is disconnected orrun down, the push button start functionmemorizes the current mode. After youreconnect, replace, or recharge the bat-tery, the memorized mode is selected au-tomatically. In any of these cases, turn offthe engine if the engine comes on.

Wait 10 seconds to start the engine afterthe battery has been reconnected. Theengine may not start on the first try. Thisdoes not indicate a malfunction.

NOTICE

� Do not race a cold engine.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, have theengine checked immediately.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

300

TIPS FOR USING SMART KEY SYSTEM

When using the smart key system, it ispossible to start or stop the engine aslong as the key is on your person.

For this reason, it is possible that a pas-senger may remove the key from the ve-hicle without the driver being aware of thefact. In such a case, it is not possible torestart the engine after having turned itoff. In addition, it is possible that one mayget out of the vehicle without being awarethat the ignition switch has not beenturned off completely.

When driving or getting in or out of thevehicle, drivers should make sure thatthey are carrying the key.

CAUTION

Do not touch the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch (engine switch) whiledriving.

If you have to make an emergency stop,press and hold the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.

Smart key system warning light

SYSTEM FUNCTION REMINDERS

Follow the instructions described below ifany of the following warnings occur:

(A) A warning buzzer sounds once fromthe instrument cluster when the igni-tion switch is turned on

This indicates that the driver has gotteninto the vehicle without the key. The smartkey system warning light on the instru-ment panel will come on.

Operate the ignition switch only after tak-ing care that the key is in the vehicle.

(B) A warning buzzer beeps repeatedlyfrom the instrument cluster whenopening the driver’s door

This indicates that the ignition switch isnot set at OFF although the transmissionselector lever has been set in the “P”position.

Get out of the vehicle only after turningoff the engine by pressing the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch and checking thatthe ignition switch indicator light has goneoff.

Driving and parking usingsmart key system


301

(C) A warning buzzer sounds once fromthe instrument cluster, accompaniedby three warning sounds from thevehicle when the driver gets out ofthe vehicle and closes the door

This indicates that the driver is attemptingto leave the vehicle carrying the key, ne-glecting to follow the instructions for case(B) above. In addition, the smart key sys-tem warning light on the instrument panelwill come on.

Get out of the vehicle only after turningoff the engine by pressing the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch and checking thatthe ignition switch indicator light has goneoff. If the driver returns to the vehiclewithout carrying the key and begins driv-ing, a warning buzzer will sound oncemore.

(D) A warning buzzer sounds from thevehicle for 2 seconds after lockingthe door with the door handle switch

This indicates that the driver is attemptingto lock the doors while carrying the key,neglecting to follow the instructions forcases (B) and (C) above.

Lock the doors only after turning off theengine by pressing the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch and checking that the igni-tion switch indicator light has gone off.

A warning buzzer that sounds even thoughthe engine has been turned off indicatesthat you are attempting to lock the vehiclewith the keys still in the vehicle.

Leave the vehicle only after making surethat you are carrying the key.

(E) A warning buzzer sounds continu-ously from the instrument clusterwhen opening the driver’s door

This indicates that the transmission selec-tor lever is in a position other than “P”and that the ignition switch is not set atOFF.

Get out of the vehicle only after settingthe transmission selector lever in the “P”position, turning off the engine by pressingthe “ENGINE START STOP” switch andchecking that the ignition switch indicatorlight has gone off.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

302

(F) A warning buzzer sounds continu-ously from the instrument clusterand from the vehicle when closingthe door after getting out of the ve-hicle

This indicates that the driver is attemptingto leave the vehicle carrying the key, ne-glecting to follow the instructions for case(E) above. The smart key system warninglight on the instrument panel will come on.

Get out of the vehicle only after settingthe transmission selector lever in the “P”position, turning off the engine by pressingthe “ENGINE START STOP” switch andchecking that the ignition switch indicatorlight has gone off.

(G) A warning buzzer sounds once fromthe instrument cluster and threetimes from the vehicle when a pas-senger is getting out of the vehicle

This indicates that the passenger is at-tempting to leave the vehicle carrying thekey, without the ignition switch is not setat OFF. The smart key system warninglight on the instrument panel will alsocome on.

When passengers get out of the vehicle,care should be taken to leave the keywith the driver. If the driver begins drivingafter a passenger gets out of the vehiclecarrying the key, a warning buzzer willsound once more.

(H) A warning buzzer sounds from thevehicle for 2 seconds when lockingthe vehicle from the outside with thedoor handle switch

This indicates that the driver is attemptingto lock the door with the key still in thevehicle.

Leave the vehicle only after making surethat you are carrying the key.

(I) A warning buzzer sounds once fromthe instrument cluster when turningoff the ignition switch

This indicates that the key battery is low.(This warning buzzer sounds only whenthe engine has been on or the ignitionswitch has been set at the ON for 20minutes or more.)

Change the key battery ahead of time inorder to ensure that the smart key systemproperly.

(J) A warning buzzer sounds continu-ously from the instrument clusterwhen opening the driver’s door withthe ignition switch turned off.

This indicates that the steering wheel isnot locked. Turn the engine off and thenopen the door in order to lock the steeringwheel.


303

(K) The “ENGINE START STOP” switchflashes green once every second.

This indicates that the steering lock isstuck. To free it, rock the steering wheelslightly while pressing the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch.

(L) The “ENGINE START STOP” switchflashes amber once every 2 seconds.

This indicates a problem with the pushbutton start function or the steering lockfunction. Have your vehicle checked at aToyota dealer.

THEFT PREVENTION FUNCTION

� When the engine is turned off, the en-gine immobilizer system is automatical-ly set. (See “Engine immobilizer sys-tem” on page 16 in Section 1−2.)

� When the driver’s door is opened afterturning off the engine, the steeringwheel will lock.

When the vehicle’s battery is dis-charged, the steering lock function maynot operate properly.

� Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

� Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp−edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage suchas a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumpsor travelling on a bumpy road. Other-wise, the impact could cause severedamage to the tires and/or wheels.

� When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P”. If necessary, block thewheels.

� Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

Tips for driving in variousconditions

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

304

CAUTION

� Before driving off, make sure theparking brake is fully released andthe parking brake reminder light isoff.

� Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the engine is running.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

� To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

� Be careful when accelerating, up-shifting, downshifting or braking ona slippery surface. Sudden accelera-tion or engine braking, could causethe vehicle to skid or spin.

� Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas high−speed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare high−speed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

� Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.

Make sure you have a proper freezeprotection for engine coolant.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

See “Checking the engine coolant level”on page 358 in Section 7−2 for details ofcoolant type selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35�C(−31�F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42�C(−44�F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Winter driving tips


305

Check the condition of the battery andcables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity ofany battery, so it must be in top shape toprovide enough power for winter starting.Section 7−3 tells you how to visually in-spect the battery. Your Toyota dealer andmost service stations will be pleased tocheck the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See page 357 in Section 7−2 for recom-mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-mer oil in your vehicle during wintermonths may cause harder starting. If youare not sure about which oil to use, callyour Toyota dealer—they will be pleasedto help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into“P” and block the rear wheels. Do not usethe parking brake, or snow or water accu-mulated in and around the parking brakemechanism may freeze, making it hard torelease.

Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to bedinghy towed (with four wheels on theground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with fourwheels on the ground. This maycause serious damage to your vehicle.

Dinghy towing

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

306

Your vehicle is designed primarily as apassenger−carrying vehicle. Towing atrailer will have an adverse effect onhandling, performance, braking, durabilityand driving economy (fuel consumption,etc.). Your safety and satisfaction dependon the proper use of correct equipmentand cautious driving habits. For yoursafety and the safety of others, you mustnot overload your vehicle or trailer. Toyotawarranties do not apply to damage ormalfunction caused by towing a trailer forcommercial purposes. Ask your localToyota dealer for further details beforetowing.

NOTICE

When towing a trailer, be sure to con-sult your Toyota dealer for further in-formation on additional requirementssuch as a towing kit, etc.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-er weight, gross vehicle weight, grossaxle weight and trailer tongue load areall within the limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue loadcan be measured with platform scalesfound at a highway weighing station, build-ing supply company, trucking company,junk yard, etc.

CAUTION

� The total trailer weight (trailerweight plus its cargo load) mustnot exceed 454 kg (1000 lb.). Ex-ceeding this weight is dangerous.

� Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-ent weight capacities established bythe hitch manufacturer. Even thoughthe vehicle may be physically capa-ble of towing a higher weight, theoperator must determine the maxi-mum weight rating of the particularhitch assembly and never exceedthe maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailer−hitch. Exceedingthe maximum weight rating set bythe trailer hitch manufacturer cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

Trailer towing


307

� The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on theCertification Label. The gross ve-hicle weight is the sum of weightsof the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailertongue load. It also includes theweight of any special equipmentinstalled on your vehicle.

� The load on either the front or rearaxle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on bothaxles must not exceed the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listedon the Certification Label.

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

Total trailer weight� 100 = 9 to 11%

� The trailer cargo load should bedistributed so that the tongue loadis 9 to 11% of the total trailerweight, not exceeding the maximumof 45 kg (100 lb.). Never load thetrailer with more weight in the backthan in the front. About 60% of thetrailer load should be in the fronthalf of the trailer and the remaining40% in the rear.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

308

HITCHES

� Use only a hitch which is recom-mended by the hitch manufacturer andconforms to the total trailer weight re-quirement.

� Follow the directions supplied by thehitch manufacturer, and bolt the hitchsecurely to the rear bumper. Lubricatethe hitch ball with a light coat ofgrease.

� Toyota recommends removing the trail-er hitch whenever you are not towinga trailer to reduce the possibility ofadditional damage caused by the hitchif your vehicle is struck from behind.After removing the hitch, seal anymounting holes in the vehicle body toprevent entry of pollutants such as ex-haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

NOTICE

Do not use axle−mounted hitches asthey can cause damage to the axlehousing, wheel bearings, wheels ortires. Also, never install a hitch whichmay interfere with the normal functionof an Energy Absorbing Bumper.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

� Toyota recommends trailers withbrakes that conform to any applica-ble federal and state/provincial regu-lations.

� A safety chain must always be usedbetween the towing vehicle and thetrailer. Leave sufficient slack in thechain for turns. The chain shouldcross under the trailer tongue toprevent the tongue from dropping tothe ground in case it becomes dam-aged or separated. For correct safetychain procedures, follow the hitch ortrailer manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.

CAUTION

� Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-draulic system as it would lower itsbraking effectiveness.

� Never tow a trailer without using asafety chain securely attached toboth the trailer and the vehicle. Ifdamage occurs to the coupling unitor hitch ball, there is danger of thetrailer wandering over into anotherlane.

TIRES

� Ensure that your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated. See Section 7−2 andSection 8 for instructions.

� The trailer tires should be inflated tothe pressure recommended by the trail-er manufacturer in respect to the totaltrailer weight.

TRAILER LIGHTS

� Trailer lights must comply with federal,state/provincial and local regulations.See your local recreational vehicledealer or rental agency for the correcttype of wiring and relays for your trail-er. Check for correct operation of theturn signals and stop lights each timeyou hitch up. Direct splicing may dam-age your vehicle’s electrical systemand cause a malfunction of your lights.


309

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

� Toyota recommends that you do nottow a trailer with a new vehicle or avehicle with any new power train com-ponent (engine, transmission, differen-tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

� If you tow a trailer, your vehicle willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. For this informa-tion, please refer to the scheduledmaintenance information in the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’sManual Supplement”.

� Retighten all fixing bolts of the towingball and bracket after approximately1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

� Check that your vehicle remains levelwhen a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle hasan abnormal nose−up or nose−downcondition, and check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes.

� Make sure the trailer cargo is securelyloaded so that it can not shift.

� Check that your rear view mirrors con-form to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not,install the rear view mirrors requiredfor towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than when not tow-ing. The three main causes of vehicle−trailer accidents are driver error, exces-sive speed and improper trailer loading.Keep these in mind when towing:

� Before starting out, check operation ofthe lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-tions. After driving a short distance,stop and recheck the lights and con-nections. Before actually towing a trail-er, practice turning, stopping and back-ing with a trailer in an area away fromtraffic until you learn the feel.

� Backing with a trailer is difficult andrequires practice. Grip the bottom ofthe steering wheel and move your handto the left to move the trailer to theleft. Move your hand to the right tomove the trailer to the right. (This pro-cedure is generally opposite to thatwhen backing without a trailer.) Also,just turn the steering wheel a little ata time, avoiding sharp or prolongedturning. Have someone guide you whenbacking to reduce the risk of an acci-dent.

� Because stopping distance may be in-creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distanceshould be increased when towing atrailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) ofspeed, allow at least one vehicle andtrailer length between you and the ve-hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking asyou may skid, resulting in jackknifingand loss of control. This is especiallytrue on wet or slippery surfaces.

� Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-tion.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

310

� Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.The trailer could hit your vehicle in atight turn. Slow down before making aturn to avoid the necessity of suddenbraking.

� Remember that when making a turn,the trailer wheels will be closer thanthe vehicle wheels to the inside of theturn. Therefore, compensate for this bymaking a larger than normal turningradius with your vehicle.

� Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect handling of your vehicleand trailer, causing sway. Pay attentionto the rear from time to time to pre-pare yourself for being passed by largetrucks or buses, which may cause yourvehicle and trailer to sway. If swayinghappens, firmly grip the steering wheeland reduce speed immediately butgradually. Never increase speed. Steerstraight ahead. If you make no extremecorrection with the steering or brakes,the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

� Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, donot forget the length of your trailer andbe sure you have plenty of room be-fore changing lanes.

� In order to maintain engine braking effi-ciency do not use overdrive.

� Because of the added load of the trail-er, your vehicle’s engine may overheaton hot days (at temperatures over30�C [85�F]) when going up a long orsteep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, immediately turn off the airconditioning (if in use), pull off the roadand stop in a safe spot. Refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” in Section 4.

� Always place wheel blocks under boththe vehicle and trailer wheels whenparking. Apply the parking brake firmly.Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-ing on a slope with a trailer, but if itcannot be avoided, do so only afterperforming the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release your brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.

When restarting out after parking on aslope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position,start the engine. Be sure to keep thebrake pedal depressed.

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal and slowly pull or back awayfrom the wheel blocks. Stop and applyyour brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.


311

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) orthe posted towing speed limit,whichever is lower. Because insta-bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle−trailer combination usually in-creases as the speed increases, ex-ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) maycause loss of control.

� Slow down and downshift beforedescending steep or long downhillgrades. Do not make sudden down-shifts.

� Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. Thiscould cause the brakes to overheatand result in reduced braking effi-ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

� Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See page361 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

� Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the engine, causinggreater fuel consumption.

� Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Oncethe engine is running smoothly, begindriving—but gently. Remember, howev-er, that on cold winter days this maytake a little longer.

� Put the selector lever into the “D”when engine braking is not required.Driving without the “D” position will re-duce the fuel economy. (For details,see “Automatic transmission” on page161 in Section 1−7.)

� Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts.

� Avoid long engine idling. If you havea long wait and you are not in traffic,it is better to turn off the engine andstart again later.

� Avoid engine lugging or over−rev-ving. Use a gear position suitable forthe road on which you are travelling.

� Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop−and−go drivingwastes fuel.

� Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

� Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal. This causes premature wear,overheating and poor fuel economy.

� Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

312

� Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

� Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

� Keep your vehicle tuned−up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.all lower engine performance and con-tribute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all parts and lower operatingcosts, keep all maintenance work onschedule, and if you often drive undersevere conditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance.(For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-al Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coastdown hills. Your power steering andbrake booster will not function with-out the engine running. Also, theemission control system operatesproperly only when the engine is run-ning.


313

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYIn case of an emergencyIf your vehicle will not start 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your engine stalls while driving 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase engine speed 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 331. . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 332. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

314

Before making these checks, make sureyou have followed the correct startingprocedure given in “How to start theengine” on page 296 in Section 3 and thatyou have sufficient fuel. Also, checkwhether the other keys will start theengine. If they work, your key may bebroken. Have the key checked at yourToyota dealer. If none of your keys work,there may be a malfunction in the immobi-lizer system. Call your Toyota dealer. (See“Keys” on pages 12 or 14 in Section 1−2.)

If the engine is not turning over or isturning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals aretight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switchon the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes outwhen the starter is cranked, the batteryis discharged. You may try jump start-ing. See “(c) Jump starting” on page315 for further instructions.

4. With smart key system—If the enginedoes not start even after the batteryhas been recharged or replace, see“(d) Starting the engine after a batterydischarge” on page 318 for further in-struction.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still willnot start, it needs adjustment or repair.Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repairshop.

NOTICE

Do not pull− or push−start the ve-hicle. Your vehicle may suddenlymove when the engine starts, andmay damage itself or cause a colli-sion. Also the three−way catalyticconverter may overheat and become afire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normalspeed but will not start—

1. Set the ignition switch to ACC or offand try starting the engine again.

2. If the engine will not start, the enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking. See “(b) Starting a floodedengine” on page 314 for further instruc-tions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyotadealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking.

With key cylinder−type ignition switch—Ifthis happens, turn the key to “START”with the accelerator pedal fully depressed.Keep the key and accelerator pedal inthese positions for 15 seconds and re-lease them. Then try starting the enginewith your foot off the accelerator pedal.

With smart key system—If this happens,press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch(engine switch) with the brake pedal andthe accelerator pedal fully depressed, andhold the “ENGINE START STOP” switchfor about 30 seconds. Then the crankinghold function stops cranking automatically,and you can try starting the engine withyour foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the engine does not start, wait a fewminutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop for assistance.

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine


315

NOTICE

With key cylinder−type ignitionswitch—Do not crank for more than30 seconds at a time. This may over-heat the starter and wiring systems.

To avoid serious personal injury anddamage to your vehicle which might re-sult from battery explosion, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, these instructions must befollowed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

� Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

� If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water im-mediately. Then get immediate medi-cal attention. If possible, continueto apply water with a sponge orcloth while en route to the medicaloffice.

� The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

(c) Jump starting

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

316

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery ofmatching or higher quality. Any otherbattery may be difficult to jump startwith.

If jump starting is difficult, charge thebattery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster and discharged batter-ies. Lay a cloth over the open ventson the batteries. (This helps reduce theexplosion hazard, personal injuries andburns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting, run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

Boosterbattery

Discharged battery

Positive terminal(“+” mark)

Jumper cable

Positiveterminal(“+” mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal on the boosterbattery.

Jumper cable

BoosterbatteryNegative terminal

(“−” mark)

Discharged battery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) jumper cable to the negative(−) terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cable toa solid, stationary, unpainted, metallicpoint of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

The recommended connecting point isshown in the following illustration:


317

Connecting point

Do not connect the cable to or nearany part that moves when the engineis cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.

5. With smart key system—Charge thedischarged battery with the jumpercables connected for approximately 5minutes. At this time, run the engine inthe vehicle with the booster battery atabout 2000 rpm with the acceleratorpedal lightly depressed.

6. Start your engine in the normal way.After starting, run it at about 2000 rpmfor several minutes with the acceleratorpedal lightly depressed.

7. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

8. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

9. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

With smart key system—The engine maynot restart even after battery charging orreplacement. If this happens, see “(d)Starting the engine after a battery dis-charge” described below.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent (for example, lights left on),you should have it checked at your Toyotadealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumpercables are tight. Recharge the dischargedbattery with the jumper cables connectedfor several minutes and restart your en-gine in the normal way.

If the another attempt is not successful,the battery may be depleted. Have it ch-ecked at your Toyota dealer.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

318

With smart key system only—

In the event that the battery is dis-charged, the engine may not restarteven after the battery is recharged orreplaced. For safety reasons, the enginemay be disabled when battery voltageis extremely low. If the engine is dis-abled, the start system must be normal-ized.

To normalize the start system:

1. Shift the transmission to the “P” posi-tion and set the ignition switch off.

2. Open and close any of the doors.

3. Start the engine.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Set the ignition switch to ACC or off,and try starting the engine again.

If the engine will not start, see “If yourvehicle will not start” on page 314 in thisSection.

CAUTION

� If the engine is not running, thepower assist for the brakes andsteering will not work so steeringand braking will be much harderthan usual.

� Vehicles with smart key system—If the engine stalls while driving, donot open the driver’s door until thevehicle comes to a complete stop.Opening the driver’s door locks thesteering wheel, resulting in loss ofsteering control.

If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andset the ignition switch to ACC or off.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

(d) Starting the engine after abattery discharge

If your engine stalls whiledriving

If you cannot incr ease enginespeed


319

If your engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating, if you ex-perience a loss of power, or if you heara loud knocking or pinging noise, theengine has probably overheated. Youshould follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the transmission in “P”and apply the parking brake. Turn offthe air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the engine.Wait until the steam subsides beforeopening the hood. If there is no coolantboiling over or steam, leave the enginerunning and make sure the electriccooling fan is operating. If it is not,turn the ignition off.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the en-gine immediately. Call a Toyota dealerfor assistance.

5. If there are no obvious leaks, checkthe coolant reservoir. If it is dry, addcoolant to the reservoir while the en-gine is running. Fill it about half full.For the coolant type, see “Coolant typeselection” on page 358 in Section 7−2.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the engine and radiator arehot. Serious injury could result fromscalding hot fluid and steam blownout under pressure.

6. After the engine coolant temperaturehas cooled to normal, again check thecoolant level in the reservoir. If neces-sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-ous coolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

If your vehicle overheats

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

320

1. Reduce your speed gradually,keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe placewell away from the traffic. Avoidstopping on the center divider ofa highway. Park on a level spotwith firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on youremergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake andput the transmission in “P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructionsthoroughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observethe following to reduce the possi-bility of death or serious injury:� Follow jacking instructions.� Do not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-ported by the jack. Otherwise,personal injury may occur.

� Do not start or run the enginewhile your vehicle is supportedby the jack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parkingbrake and put the transmissionin “P”. Block the wheel diago-nally opposite to the one beingchanged if necessary.

� Make sure to set the jack prop-erly in the jack point. Raisingthe vehicle with jack improper-ly positioned will damage thevehicle or may allow the ve-hicle to fall off the jack andcause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehiclewhen the vehicle is supportedby the jack alone.

� Use the jack only for liftingyour vehicle during wheelchanging.

� Do not raise the vehicle withsomeone in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, donot place any objects on topof or underneath the jack.

� Raise the vehicle only highenough to remove and changethe tire.

If you have a flat tire—


321

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with adeflated tire. Driving even ashort distance can damage atire and wheel beyond repair.

Compact spare tireThe compact spare tire is designedfor temporary emergency use only.The compact spare tire is identifiedby the distinctive wording“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” moldedinto the side wall of the tire.The compact spare tire saves spacein your luggage compartment, and itslighter weight helps to improve fueleconomy and permits easier installa-tion in case of a flat tire.

The compact spare tire can be usedmany times, if necessary. It has treadlife of up to 4800 km (3000 miles) de-pending on road conditions and yourdriving habits. When tread wear indi-cators appear on the tire, replace thetire.See also the tire information on page363 in Section 7−2 for details on thetread wear indicators and other ser-vice information.

CAUTION

� The compact spare tire was de-signed especially for your Toy-ota. Do not use it on any othervehicle.

� Do not use more than one com-pact spare tire at the sametime.

� The pressure for the compactspare tire must be 420 kPa (4.2kgf/cm 2 or bar, 60 psi).

� Do not exceed 80 km/h (50mph) when driving with thecompact spare tire.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

322

� Replace the compact spare tirewith the standard tire as soonas possible.

� Avoid sudden a cceleration,sudden d eceleration and sharpturns with the compact sparetire.

NOTICE

Your ground clearance is re-duced when the compact sparetire is installed so avoid drivingover obstacles and drive slowlyon rough, unp aved roads andspeed bumps. Also, do not at-tempt to go through an auto-matic car wash as the vehiclemay get caught, resulting indamage.

1. Get the required tools andspare tire.1. Jack handle2. Wheel nut wrench3. Jack4. Spare tire

To prepare yourself for an emergency,you should familiarize yourself withthe use of the jack, each of the toolsand their storage locations.

To remove the jack, turn the jack jointby hand until the jack becomes free.

—Required tools and sparetire


323

To store the jack, align the hole of thejack head with the vehicle hook. Turnthe jack joint until the jack base fitssecurely with the vehicle body.This prevents the jack from flying for-ward during a collision or suddenstop.

To remove the spare tire:1. Loosen the nut and remove it.2. Remove the spare tire cover.3. Loosen the bolt and remove it.4. Remove the spacer.Then take the spare tire out of thevehicle.When storing the spare tire, put it inplace with the outer side of the wheelfacing up. Then secure the tire by re-peating the above removal steps inreverse order to prevent it from flyingforward during a collision or suddenbraking.

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-posite the flat tire to keep thevehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place awheel block in front of one of the frontwheels or behind one of the rearwheels.

—Blocking the wheel

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

324

3. Remove the wheel ornament.Pry off the wheel ornament, using thebeveled end of the wheel nut wrenchas shown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the orna-ment by hand. Take due care inhandling the ornament to avoidunexpected personal injury.

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.Always loosen the wheel nuts beforeraising the vehicle.Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwiseto loosen. To get maximum leverage,fit the wrench to the nut so that thehandle is on the right side, as shownabove. Grab the wrench near the endof the handle and pull up on the han-dle. Be careful that the wrench doesnot slip off the nut.Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-screw them about one−half turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. The nuts may looseand the wheels may fall off,which could cause a serious ac-cident.

—Removing wheel ornament(on some models) —Loosening wheel nuts


325

5. Position the jack at the correctjack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned ona level and solid place.

6. After making sure that no oneis in the vehicle, raise it highenough so that the spare tirecan be installed.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the sparetire than when removing the flat tire.To raise the vehicle, insert the jackhandle into the jack (it is a loose fit)and turn it clockwise. As the jacktouches the vehicle and begins to lift,double−check that it is properly posi-tioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by thejack alone.

—Positioning the jack —Raising your vehicle

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

326

7. Remove the wheel nuts andchange tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with thebolts. Then lift up the wheel and getat least the top bolt started throughits hole. Wiggle the tire and press itback over the other bolts.

Before putting on wheels, remove anycorrosion on the mounting surfaceswith a wire brush or such. Installationof wheels without good metal−to−met-al contact at the mounting surface cancause wheel nuts to loosen andeventually cause a wheel to come offwhile driving.

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered endinward) and tighten them as much asyou can by hand. Press back on thetire and see if you can tighten themmore.

—Changing wheels —Reinstalling wheel nuts


327

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. Doing so may leadto overtightening the nuts anddamaging the bolts. The nutsmay loose and the wheels mayfall off, which could cause a seri-ous accident. If there is oil orgrease on any bolt or nut, cleanit.

9. Lower the vehicle completelyand tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclock-wise to lower the vehicle.Use only the wheel nut wrench andturn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.Do not use other tools or any addition-al leverage other than your hands,such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.Make sure the wrench is securely en-gaged over the nut.Tighten each nut a little at a time inthe order shown. Repeat the processuntil all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION

� When lowering the vehicle,make sure all portions of yourbody and all other personsaround will not be injured asthe vehicle is lowered to theground.

� Have the wheel nuts tightenedwith torque wrench to 103 N·m(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soonas possible after changingwheels. Otherwise, the nutsmay loosen and the wheelsmay fall off, which could causea serious accident.

—Lowering your vehicle

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

328

10.Reinstall the wheel ornament.Align the cutout of the wheel orna-ment with the valve stem as shown.Then press hand firmly on one sideof wheel ornament and then firmly tapthe other side around the edge ofwheel ornament with the heel of yourhand to snap into place.

CAUTION

� Take due care in handling theornament to avoid unexpectedpersonal injury.

� Do not attach a heavily dam-aged plastic wheel ornament.It may fly off the wheel andcause accidents while the ve-hicle is moving.

11.Check the air pressure of the re-placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-cation designated on page 386 inSection 8. If the pressure is lower,drive slowly to the nearest servicestation and fill to the correct pressure.Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-tion valve cap as dirt and moisturecould get into the valve core andpossibly cause air leakage. If the capis missing, have a new one put on assoon as possible.12.Restow all the tools, jack and

flat tire securely.As soon after changing wheels aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thetorque specified on page 386 in Sec-tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have atechnician repair the flat tire and re-place the spare tire with it.

—Reinstalling wheel ornament(on some models) —After changing wheels


329

Initial adjustment of the tirepressure warning system is nec-essary after you have replacedyour tires or wheels. See “Tirepressure warning system” onpage 169 in Section 1−7.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are se-curely in place in their storagelocation to reduce the possibilityof personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden braking.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attemptto rock the vehicle free by moving itforward and backward.

Vehicles with traction control system—The traction control system can beturned off to become unstuck to allowthe tires to spin enough to remove thevehicle from the obstruction. Contactyour Toyota dealer for detailed informa-tion.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward and back-ward if people or objects are any-where near the vehicle. During therocking operation the vehicle maysuddenly move forward or backwardas it becomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people or ob-jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.

� Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

� Do not race the engine and avoidspinning the wheels.

� If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

If your vehicle becomes stuck

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

330

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice. In consultation with them, haveyour vehicle towed using either (a) or(b).

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front— Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to en-sure adequate ground clearance fortowing at the opposite end of theraised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumperand/or underbody of the towed vehiclewill be damaged during towing.

From rear— Use a towing dolly under thefront wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow from the rear with the frontwheels on the ground, as this maycause serious damage to the trans-mission.

(b) Using flat bed truck

If your vehicle needs to betowed—


331

(c) Towing with slingtype truck

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.

If you cannot shift the selector leverout of “P” position to other positionseven though the brake pedal is de-pressed, use the shift lock override but-ton as follows:

1. Make sure the engine is off and theparking brake is applied.

2. Pry up the cover with a flatheadscrewdriver or equivalent.

3. Insert your finger into the hole topush down the shift lock overridebutton. You can shift out of “P”position only while pushing the but-ton.

4. Shift into “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If you cannot shift automatictransmission selector lever

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

332

You can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number and master key.

Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignitionswitch—Even if you lose only one key,contact your Toyota dealer at the earliestopportunity to make a new key. If youlose all your master keys, you cannotmake new keys; the whole engine immobi-lizer system must be replaced.

Vehicles with smart key system—If youlose any of your keys, contact yourToyota dealer to have new keys made.Lost keys increase the danger of vehicletheft. Bring all of the remaining vehiclekeys when you visit your Toyota dealer.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpages 12 or 14 in Section 1−2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

You can purchase a new wireless re-mote control transmitter at your Toyotadealer.

Have the registered identification numbersof your transmitters deleted from your ve-hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to avoid the possibility of theft oran accident. Then, have the identificationnumber of your new transmitter registered.At the same time, you must bring all ofthe remaining transmitters to have themregistered again as well.

You can use the wireless remote controlfunction with the new transmitter. Contactyour Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If you lose your keysIf you lose your wirelessremote control transmitter


333

CORROSION PREVENTION ANDAPPEARANCE CARECorrosion prevention and appearance careProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

334

Toyota, through the diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, helps prevent corro-sion and provides you with the finest qual-ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up toyou. Proper care of your Toyota can helpensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

� The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard−to−reach areas underthe vehicle.

� Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

� Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea−coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

� High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

� Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

� High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which do not dry quickly due tolack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

� If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

� High pressure water or steam is effec-tive for cleaning the vehicle’s undersideand wheel housings. Pay particularattention to these areas as it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to simply wet themud and debris without removing. Thelower edge of doors, rocker panels andframe members have drain holes whichshould not be allowed to clog with dirtas trapped water in these areas cancause corrosion.

� Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” onpage 335 for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion


335

Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full−sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it covered withwater or snow, your garage may be sodamp as to cause corrosion. Even if yourgarage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-rode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

� When driving in a coastal area

� When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

� When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,bird droppings and carcass of an insect

� When driving in areas where there isa lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust orchemical substances

� When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not warm to the touch.

CAUTION

� When cleaning under floor or chas-sis, be careful not to injure yourhands.

� Exhaust gases cause the exhaustpipe to become quite hot. Whenwashing the vehicle, be careful notto touch the pipe until it has cooledsufficiently, as touching a hot ex-haust pipe can cause burns.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or the wheelwells.

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−pressure car wash, for example) at ornear the fuel tank inlet with the fuel fillerdoor opened. If the water enters the airvent, you may experience trouble with re-fueling or rough engine idling.

Washing and waxing yourToyota

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

336

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splash an ornament, be sure towash them off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not useorganic substances or scrub them with ahard brush. This may damage the sur-faces of the lights.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances(gasoline, kerosene, benzine orstrong solvents), which may be tox-ic or cause damage.

� Do not scrub any part of the ve-hicle with a hard brush, which maycause damage.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some types ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehiclesurface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.

Windshield washer nozzles: Make surethat the nozzles do not become blockedwhen waxing. If a nozzle becomesblocked, contact your Toyota dealer tohave the vehicle serviced.

NOTICE



337

Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on thesurfaces of the lights. Wax may causedamage to the lenses. If you accidentallyput wax on the light surfaces, wipe orwash it off.

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

CAUTION

� Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side and curtain shieldairbags from activating correctly, re-sulting in serious injury.

� Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause a malfunction; and it maycause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt does not come off,repeat the procedure. Commercial foam-ing−type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol cans and others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Cleaning the interior

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

338

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

� Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

� Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

� When cleaning the inside of therear window, be careful not toscratch or damage the heater wiresor connectors.

� When cleaning the inside of therear window, be careful not toscratch or damage the printed an-tenna.

Air conditioning control panel, audiopanel, instrument panel, console panel,and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

� If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

� If you use a liquid car freshener, donot spill the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.

Leather interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.


339

After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.

NOTICE

� If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

� Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

� Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

� Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

� Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.

� The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm.

� Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

340


341

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREVehicle maintenance and careMaintenance requirements 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 346. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

342

Your Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day−to−day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, and trouble−free, safe, and eco-nomical drivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle and emis-sion control system warranties specify thatproper maintenance and care must be per-formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−to−day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to ensure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacementparts used for maintenance or for therepair of the emission control systembe Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in−dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-lems should arise with your vehicle whileunder warranty, your Toyota dealer willpromptly take care of it. Again, be sureto keep a copy of the repair order for anyservice performed on your Toyota.

Maintenance requirements


343

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented on page 347 inSection 7.

If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechan-ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-mended. Please be aware that do−it−your-self maintenance can affect your warrantycoverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-quate ventilation if you run the en-gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluidMake sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See page 375 in Section 7−3 foradditional information.

Engine coolant levelMake sure the coolant level is betweenthe “F” and “L” lines on the see−throughreservoir when the engine is cold. Seepage 358 in Section 7−2 for additionalinformation.

Radiator, condenser and hosesCheck that the front of the radiator andcondenser are clean and not blocked withleaves, dirt, or insects. See page 359 inSection 7−2 for additional information.

Battery conditionCheck the battery condition by the indica-tor color. See page 373 in Section 7−3 foradditional information.

Brake fluid levelMake sure the brake fluid level is correct.See page 359 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Engine oil levelCheck the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon a level spot. See page 356 in Section7−2 for additional information.

Power steering fluid levelCheck the level through the reservoir. Thelevel should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”range depending on the fluid temperature.See page 360 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

General maintenance

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

344

Exhaust systemIf you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 270 in Section 2.)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

LightsMake sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzersCheck that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheelCheck that it has the specified free play.Be alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

SeatsCheck that all front seat controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op-erate smoothly and that all latches locksecurely in any position. Check that thehead restraints move up and downsmoothly and that the locks hold securelyin any latched position.

Seat beltsCheck that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure the beltwebbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-aged.

Accelerator pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

BrakesIn a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brakeCheck that the pedal has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-nismCheck the lock release button of the se-lector lever for proper and smooth opera-tion. On a safe incline, check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selectorlever in “P” position and all brakes re-leased.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Wiper blades

Check for wear or cracks whenever theydo not wipe cleanly. See page 375 inSection 7−3 for additional information.

Fluid leaksCheck underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hoodCheck that all doors including trunk lidoperate smoothly and all latches lock se-curely. Make sure the engine hood sec-ondary latch secures the hood from open-ing when the primary latch is released.

Tire inflation pressureCheck the pressure with a gauge ev-ery two weeks, or at least once amonth. See page 361 in Section 7−2for additional information.


345

Tire surface and wheel nutsCheck the tires carefully for cuts,damage or excessive wear. See page363 in Section 7−2 for additional in-formation. When checking the tires,make sure no nuts are missing, andcheck the nuts for looseness. Tightenthem if necessary.Tire rotationRotate the tires according to themaintenance schedule. (For sched-uled maintenance information, pleaserefer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.) See page 365 in Section 7−2for additional information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

� Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

� Appreciable loss of power

� Strange engine noises

� A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-ter dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

� Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

� Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

� Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

� Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

� Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake pedal; pedal almosttouches floor; vehicle pulls to one sidewhen braking

� Engine coolant temperature continuallyhigher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

Does your vehicle needrepairing?

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

346

Some states have vehicle emission in-spection programs which include OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operationof the emission control system. When theOBD system determines that a problemexists somewhere in the emission controlsystem, the malfunction indicator lampcomes on. In this case, your vehicle maynot pass the I/M test and need to berepaired. Contact your Toyota dealer toservice the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lampdoes not come on, your vehicle may notpass the I/M test as readiness codeshave not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically setduring ordinary driving. However, when thebattery is disconnected or run down, thecodes are erased. Also, depending onyour driving habits, the codes may not becompletely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp hadcome on recently due to temporary mal-function such as a loose fuel tank cap,your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips, but theerror code in the OBD system will not becleared unless about 40 trips or more aretaken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testeven the malfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on, contact your Toyota dealerto prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs


347

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroductionEngine compartment overview 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do−it−yourself service precautions 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the jack 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 1

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

348

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Engine oil level dipstick

5. Brake fluid reservoir

6. Fuse block

7. Battery

8. Radiator

9. Electric cooling fans

10. Condenser

11. Windshield washer fluid tank

Engine compartment overview


349

Spare fuses

If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This Section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section6, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do−it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts andtools” on page 352 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

Fuse locationsDo−it−yourself serviceprecautions

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

350

CAUTION

� When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan and enginedrive belts. (Removing rings,watches, and ties is advisable.)

� Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

� If the engine is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

� Do not leave anything that mayburn easily, such as paper or rags,in the engine compartment.

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebattery. Their fumes are flammable.

� Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

� Be sure that the ignition is off ifyou work near the electric coolingfans or radiator grille. With theignition on, the electric cooling fanswill automatically start to run if theengine coolant temperature is highand/or the air conditioning is on.

� Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

� Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

� Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

� Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

� Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the battery. It contains poi-sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

NOTICE

� Remember that battery and ignitioncables carry high currents or volt-ages. Be careful of accidentallycausing a short circuit.

� Add only “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality eth-ylene glycol based non−s ilicate,non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-rate coolant with long−life hybridorganic acid technology to fill theradiator. “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-ant and 50% deionized water (forthe U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%deionized water (for Canada).

� If you spill some of the coolant, besure to wash it off with water toprevent it from damaging the partsor paint.


351

� Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plug holes.

� Do not pry the outer electrode of aspark plug against the center elec-trode.

� Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

� Do not reuse iridium−tipped sparkplugs by cleaning or regapping.

� Do not overfill automatic transmis-sion fluid and power steering fluid,or the transmission and powersteering could be damaged.

� Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

� Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

� When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Front

Rear

When jacking up your vehicle with thejack, position the jack correctly asshown in the illustrations.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofdeath or serious injury:

� Follow jacking instructions.

� Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by thejack. Personal injury may occur.

� Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by thejack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the transmission in “P”.Block the wheels on the oppositeside of the jack up point if neces-sary.

� Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

Positioning the jack

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

352

� Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone; use vehicle support stands.

� Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, do notplace any objects on top of or un-derneath the jack.

NOTICE

Make sure to place the jack correctly,or your vehicle may be damaged.

Here is a list of parts and tools you willneed to perform do−it−yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

� “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-lent

See page 357 in Section 7−2 for de-tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:

� Rag or paper towel

� Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL


� “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” orsimilar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni-trite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is amixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%coolant and 45% deionized water (forCanada).

Tools:

� Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID


� SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3brake fluid

Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID


� Automatic transmission fluidDEXRON�II or III

Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

� Warm water

� Baking soda

� Grease

� Conventional wrench (for terminalclamp bolts)

Parts and tools


353

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

� Fuse with same amperage rating asoriginal

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

� Water

� Washer fluid containing antifreeze(for winter use)

Tools:

� Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

� Bulb with same number and wattagerating as original (See charts in “Re-placing light bulbs” on page 377 inSection 7−3.)

Tools:

� Screwdriver

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

354


355

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid 360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 2

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

356

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

With the engine at operating tempera-ture and turned off, check the oil levelon the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicleshould be on level ground. After turningoff the engine, wait a few minutes forthe oil to drain back into the bottom ofthe engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag underthe end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel while holding a rag under theend.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil onthe vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick. We recommend that you usea funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed toraise the level between low and full on thedipstick is indicated as follows:

1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp. qt.)

For the engine oil capacity, see “Servicespecifications” on page 383 in Section 8.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand−tight.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to spill engine oil onthe vehicle components.

� Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

� Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level


357

ENGINE OIL SELECTION

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for goodfuel economy and good starting in coldweather.

If SAE 5W−30 is not available, SAE10W−30 may be used. However, itshould be replaced with SAE 5W−30 atthe next oil change.

Oil identification mark

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is added to some oil con-tainers to help you select the oil youshould use.

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

358

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-mance for your engine, “Toyota GenuineMotor Oil” is available, which has beenspecifically tested and approved for allToyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine MotorOil”.

Look at the see−through coolant reser-voir when the engine is cold. The cool-ant level is satisfactory if it is betweenthe “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.If the level is low, add the coolant. (Forthe coolant type, see “Coolant typeselection” described below.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith engine temperature. However, if thelevel is on or below the “L” line, addcoolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, radiator cap and draincock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when the en-gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour engine cooling system.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35�C(−31�F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42�C(−44�F).

NOTICE


Checking the engine coolantlevel


359

Toyota recommends “Toyota Super LongLife Coolant”, which has been tested toensure that it will not cause corrosion norresult in malfunction of your enginecoolant system with proper usage. “ToyotaSuper Long Life Coolant” is formulatedwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology and has been specificallydesigned to avoid engine cooling systemmalfunction on Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

If any of the above parts are extremelydirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-ful not to touch the radiator or con-denser when the engine is hot afterdriving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiatorand condenser, do not perform thework by yourself.

To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see−through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear. Sobe sure to keep the reservoir filled.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, itmay indicate a serious mechanical prob-lem.

Checking the radiator andcondenser Checking brake fluid

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

360

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 orFMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to thebrake reservoir.

Remove and replace the reservoir cap byhand. Fill the brake fluid to the dottedline. This brings the fluid to the correctlevel when you put the cap back on.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Onceopened, brake fluid absorbs moisture fromthe air, and excess moisture can cause adangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the r eservoirbecause brake fluid can harm yourhands or eyes. If fluid gets on yourhands or in your eyes, flush the af-fected area with clean water immedi-ately. If you still feel uncomfortablewith your hands or eyes, go to thedoctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sureto wipe it off to prevent it from dam-aging the parts or paintwork.

If hot O.K.

If hotadd

Close Open

If cold O.K.

If coldadd

Check the fluid level through the reser-voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-mission fluid DEXRON �II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a littlemore in frigid temperatures), the fluid ishot (60�C—80�C or 140�F—175�F). Youmay also check the level when the fluidis cold (about room temperature,10�C—30�C or 50�F—85�F) if the enginehas not been run for about five hours.

Clean all dirt from the outside of the res-ervoir tank and look at the fluid level. Ifthe fluid is cold, the level should be in the“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, thefluid level should be in the “HOT” range.If the level is at the low side of eitherrange, add automatic transmission fluidDEXRON�II or III to bring the level withinthe range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-voir cap, visually check the steering boxcase, vane pump and hose connectionsfor leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so becareful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-ing could be damaged.

Checking power steering fluid


361

AI72001

Keep your tire inflation pressuresat the proper level.The recommended cold tire inflationpressures, tire sizes and the com-bined weight of occupants and cargo(vehicle capacity weight) are de-scribed on page 382 in Section 8.They are also on the tire and loadinginformation label.You should check the tire inflationpressure every two weeks, or at leastonce a month. And do not forget thespare!

The following instructions forchecking tire inflation pressureshould be observed:� The pressure s hould be

checked only when the tires arecold. If your vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours and hasnot been driven for more than 1.5km or 1 mile since, you will getan accurate cold tire inflation pres-sure reading.

� Always use a tire pressuregauge. The appearance of a tirecan be misleading. Besides, tireinflation pressures that are evenjust a few pounds off can degraderide and handling.

� Take special care when addingair to the compact spare tire.The smaller tire size can gainpressure very quickly. Add com-pressed air in small quantities andcheck the pressure often until itreaches the specified pressure.

Checking tire inflationpressure

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

362

� Do not bleed or reduce tireinflation pressure after driving.It is normal for the tire inflationpressure to be higher after driving.

� Never exceed the vehicle capac-ity weight. Passenger and lug-gage weight should be located sothat the vehicle is balanced.

Tire pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTPROCEDURE1. Remove the tire valve cap.2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge to the tire valve.3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,insert the compressed air from thevalve. In case of applying toomuch air, press the center of thevalve and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflationpressure measurement and ad-justment, apply soapy water to thevalve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.If a gauge and air pump are not avail-able, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valvecaps. Without the valve caps, dirtor moisture could get into thevalve core and cause air leakage.If the caps have been lost, havenew ones put on as soon as pos-sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure maywaste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-hicle less safe to drive.If a tire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by your Toyota deal-er.


363

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.Otherwise, the following condi-tions may occur and cause an ac-cident resulting in death or seri-ous injuries.Low tire pressure ( underinfla-tion)—� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� Poor handling� Possibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire� Poor sealing of the tire bead� Wheel deformation and/or tire

separation� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinfla-tion)—� Poor handling� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRESCheck the tire’s tread for treadwear indicators. If the indicatorsshow, replace the tires. The loca-tion of tread wear indicators isshown by the “TWI” or “ ∆” marks,etc., molded on the sidewall ofeach tire.

Checking and replacing tires

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

364

The tires on your Toyota have built−intread wear indicators to help youknow when the tires need replace-ment. When the tread depth wears to1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-tors will appear. If you can see theindicators in two or more adjacentgrooves, the tire should be replaced.The lower the tread, the higher therisk of skidding.The effectiveness of snow tires islost if the tread wears down below4 mm (0.16 in.).If you have tire damage such ascuts, splits, cracks deep e nough toexpose the fabric, or bulges indi-cating internal damage, the tireshould be repl aced.If a tire often goes flat or cannot beproperly repaired due to the size orlocation of a cut or other damage, itshould be replaced. If you are notsure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do notcontinue driving. Driving even a shortdistance can damage a tire beyondrepair.Any tires which are over 6 yearsold must be checked by a qualifiedtechnician even if damage is notobvious.Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.This applies also to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRESWhen replacing a tire, use a tire ofthe same size and construction,and the same or greater maximumload as the originally installedtires.Using any other size or type of tiremay seriously affect handling, ride,speedometer/odometer calibration,ground clearance, and clearance be-tween the body and tires or snowchains.Check that the maximum load of thereplaced tire is greater than 1/2 of theGross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)of either the front axle or the rearaxle, whichever is greater. As for themaximum load of the tire, see the loadlimit at maximum cold tire inflationpressure mentioned on the sidewallof the tire, and as for the Gross AxleWeight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-tification Label.For details about the side wall of thetire and the Certification Label, seepages 277 and 279.


365

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accidentmay occur resulting in death orserious injuries.� Do not mix radial, bias belted,

or bias−ply tires on your ve-hicle, as this may cause dan-gerous handling characteris-tics resulting in loss of control.

� Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s recommendedsize, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristicsresulting in loss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires,or at least both of the front or reartires be replaced at a time as a set.See “If you have a flat tire” on page320 for tire change procedure.When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-hicle handling and tire life. Wheelscan get out of balance with regularuse and should therefore be balancedoccasionally.When replacing a tubeless tire, theair valve should also be repl acedwith a new one.Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have replaced your tires.See “Tire pressure warning sys-tem” on page 169 in Section 1−7.

With a spare tire of the samewheel type as the installed tires

Rotating tires

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

366

With a spare tire of differentwheel type from the installedtires

To equalize the wear and help ex-tend tire life, Toyota recommendsthat you rotate your tires accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.(For scheduled maintenance infor-mation, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-er’s Manual Supplement”.)However, the most appropriate tim-ing for tire rotation may vary ac-cording to your driving habits androad surface conditions.See “If you have a flat tire” on page320 in Section 4 for tire change proce-dure.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out−of−balance wheels, or severe braking.

CAUTION

Do not include a compact sparetire when rotating the tires. It isdesigned for temporary use only.

Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have rotated your tires.See “Tire pressure warning sys-tem” on page 169 in Section 1−7.


367

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires ofthe same size, construction and loadcapacity as the originally installed tires.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

CAUTION

Do not use snow tires other than themanufacturer’s recommended size, asthis may cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol. Otherwise, an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you shouldstore them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sureto install them in the same direction whenreplacing.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

� Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

Side chain

Cross chain

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

For P215/60R16 and P215/55R17 tires,use the following type chains.

mm (in.)A Diameter of side chain 3 (0.12)B Width of side chain 10 (0.39)C Length of side chain 30 (1.18)D Diameter of cross chain 4 (0.16)E Width of cross chain 14 (0.55)F Length of cross chain 25 (0.98)

Installing snow tires andchains

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

368

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check local reg-ulations before installing chains.

NOTICE

If the wrong combination of tire andchain is used, the chains could dam-age the vehicle body.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the front tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the rear tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5—1.0 km(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

� Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

� Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

� When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

NOTICE

Do not attempt to use a tire chain onthe compact spare tire, as it may re-sult in damage to the vehicle as wellas the tire.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,the tire may slip off the wheel or causeloss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

This must be observed on compact sparetires, too.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Replacing wheels


369

Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Do not use wheels other than themanufacturer’s recommended size, asthis may cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol. Otherwise, an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

Initial adjustment of the tire pressurewarning system is necessary after youhave replaced your wheels. See “Tirepressure warning system” on page 169in Section 1−7.

� When installing aluminum wheels,check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

� If you have rotated, repaired, orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

� When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

� Use only Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

� When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

� As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

Aluminum wheel precautions

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

370


371

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking battery condition 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 374. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the wiper blades 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the headlight aim 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 3

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

372

CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.

� Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

� Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

� Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

� Never ingest electrolyte.

� Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

� Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

� If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

� If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

� If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

� If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.

Terminals

Ground cableHold−downclamp

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

Checking battery c ondition——Precautions —Checking battery exterior


373

NOTICE

� Be sure the engine and all accesso-ries are off before performing main-tenance.

� When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“−” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

� Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

� Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

If the battery is disconnected or rundown, the power window and moon roofmay not operate automatically and the jamprotection function will not function cor-rectly after you reconnect, replace or re-charge the battery. In any of these cases,you should normalize each system. Tonormalize them, see “Power windows” onpage 41 and “Electric moon roof” on page52 in Section 1−2.

Type A

Green DarkClear orlight yellow

Type B

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-cator color.

Indicator colorCondition

Type A Type BCondition

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging neces-sary. Have battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

Clear orlight

yellowRed

Have battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

� Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

� Only do a slow charge (5 A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while theengine is running. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.

—Checking battery c ondition Battery recharging pr ecautions

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

374

Good Blown

Type A

Good Blown

Type B

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 349 in Sec-tion 7−1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperativecomponent off. Pull the suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. Seepage 387 in Section 8 for the functionscontrolled by each circuit.

Type B fuses—When any of the fuses areblown, contact your Toyota dealer.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by thepull−out tool. The location of the pull−outtool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “MIRHTR”, “CIG” or “A/C” fuse, which may bedispensable for normal driving, and use itif its amperage rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeto the rating as possible. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

Checking and replacing fuses


375

If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

You should normalize the power windowand moon roof if they do not operate au-tomatically or the jam protection functiondoes not operate correctly after replacingblown fuses. To normalize the power win-dow and moon roof, see “Power windows”on page 41 and “Electric moon roof” onpage 52 in Section 1−2.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

When the wipers no longer clean ade-quately, the wiper blades may be wornor cracked, requiring replacement.

To remove the wiper blade from the arm,pull the blade in the direction of the arrowwhile squeezing the clip.

NOTICE

Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

If any washer does not work, the lowwindshield washer fluid level warninglight comes on, the washer tank may beempty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below the freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Replacing the wiper blades Adding washer fluid

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

376

Remove the cover clips with a Phillips−head screwdriver and remove the cov-ers.

Remove and install the cover clip andcover as shown in the following illustra-tions.

Removing clip

Installing clip

1: Vertical movement adjusting bolt 12: Vertical movement adjusting bolt 2

Before checking the headlight aim:

1. Be sure that the body around the head-light is not deformed.

2. Park the vehicle on a level spot.

3. The driver gets into the driver’s seatand puts the vehicle in a state ready-ing for a driving (with a full tank).

4. Bounce the vehicle several times.

Checking the headlight aim(with discharge headlight)—


377

1. Turn the vertical movement adjustingbolt 1 in either direction using a Phil-lips−head screwdriver. At this time,keep the turning direction and numberof turns in mind.

2. Turn the vertical movement adjustingbolt 2 the same number of turns andin the same direction as step 1 usinga Phillips−head screwdriver.

The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the ignition switch andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

The high mounted stoplight consists of anumber of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burnout, take your vehicle to your Toyota deal-er to have the light replaced.

CAUTION

� To prevent burning yourself, do notreplace the light bulbs while theyare hot.

� Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

—Adjusting the vertical aiming Replacing light bulbs—

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

378

Vehicles with discharge headlights—

� Do not touch the high−intensity dis-charge headlight’s high voltagesocket when the headlights areturned on. An extremely high volt-age of 20000 V will be dischargedand could result in serious injury ordeath by electric shock.

� Do not attempt to take apart or re-pair the low beam headlight bulbs,connectors, power supply circuits,or related components. Doing socould result in electric shock andserious injury or death. Call yourToyota dealer for headlight repair orservicing, including replacement ofbulbs and bulb disposal.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lens becomes wet in the rain orin a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lens, just like thewindshield fogs up in the rain. However, ifthere is a large drop of water on theinside of the lens, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Light bulbs BulbNo.

W Type

Headlights(low)

DischargebulbsHalogen bulbs

D2R

9006

35

51

A

B

Headlights(high)

9005 60 C

Front fog lights 9006 51 B

Front turnsignal/parkinglights

3457A 27/7 D

Front sidemarker lights

W5W 5 E

Rear turn signallights

469 21 D

Stop/tail lights 7443 21/5 E

Rear sidemarker lights

194 3.8 E

Tail lights 194 3.8 E

Back−up lights 921 16 E

License platelights

194 3.8 E

Interior light W5W 5 E


379

Light bulbs BulbNo. W Type

Front personallights

W5W 5 E

Rear personallights

W5W 5 E

Vanity lights 7065 1.4 F

Glove box light 74 1.2 E

Door courtesylights

168 5 E

Trunk light 2825 4.8 E

A: D2R discharge bulbsB: HB4 halogen bulbsC: HB3 halogen bulbsD: Wedge base bulbs (amber)E: Wedge base bulbs (clear)F: Double end bulbs

If either the left or right headlights,front fog, front turn signal/parking,front side marker, tail or back−up light-s, or LED ∗ type high mounted stoplightburns out, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the headlights,front fog, front turn signal/parking,front side marker, tail or back−uplight bulbs by yourself. You may dam-age the vehicle.

∗: Light−emitting Diode

—Headlights, front fog, frontturn signal/parking, front sidemarker, tail and back−uplights, and LED ∗ type highmounted stoplight

—Rear turn signal, stop/tailand rear side marker lights

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

380

a: Rear turn signal lightb: Stop/tail lightc: Rear side marker light

Use a flathead screwdriver.

—License plate lights


381

SPECIFICATIONSSpecificationsDimensions and weights 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 387. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

382

Model:3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE)

Type:6 cylinder V type 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):94.0 � 83.0 (3.70 � 3.27)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):3456 (210.9)

Overall length mm (in.) 5010 (197.2)

Overall width mm (in.) 1850 (72.8)

Overall height∗ mm (in.) 1485 (58.5)

Wheelbase mm (in.) 2820 (111.0)

Front tread mm (in.) 1581 (62.2)

Rear tread mm (in.) 1570 (61.8)

∗: Unladen vehicle

Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage) kg (lb.) 395 (870)

Towing capacity (trailer weight + cargo weight) kg (lb.) 454 (1000)

Dimensions and weights Engine


383

Fuel type:Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):70 (18.5, 15.4)

ENGINE

Spark plug type:DENSO FK20HR11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):1.1 (0.043)

NOTICE

Use only above spark plugs. Do notadjust gaps for engine performance orsmooth driveab ility.

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.qt.):

With filter 6.1 (6.4, 5.4)Without filter 5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:ILSAC multigrade engine oil.

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

Fuel Service specifications

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

384

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):8.3 (8.8, 7.3)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” isused in your Toyota vehicle at factoryfill. In order to avoid technical problems,only use “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality ethyleneglycol based non−silicate, non−amine,non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant withlong−life hybrid organic acid technology.(Coolant with long−life hybrid organicacid technology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)


Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20�C (68�F):12.6—12.8 V Fully charged12.2—12.4 V Half charged11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutesafter the key is removed (vehicles withkey cylinder−type ignition switch) or theengine is turned off (vehicles withsmart key system) with all the lightsturned off.

Charging rates:5 A max.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,Imp. qt.):

Up to 3.5 (3.7, 3.1)

Fluid type:Toyota Genuine ATF WS

Change automatic transmission fluid onlyas necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to changeautomatic transmission fluid only if yourvehicle is driven under one of the SpecialOperating Conditions listed in your“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. Whenchanging the automatic transmission fluid,use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATFJWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuringmaximum transaxle performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmissionfluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATFWS” may cause deterioration in shiftquality, locking up of your transmissionaccompanied by vibration, and ultimate-ly damage the automatic transmissionof your vehicle.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.


385

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)with the engine running, mm (in.):

77 (3.0)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when depressedwith the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf):

9—11 clicks

Fluid type:SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type:Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON�IIor III

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

386

Tire size and cold tire inflation pressure:Front and rear

kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Tire sizeTire inflation pressure

Wheel sizeTire sizeUnder 160 km/h (99 mph) Over 160 km/h (99 mph)

Wheel size

P215/60R16 94V 200 (2.0, 29) 240 (2.4, 35) 16 � 6 1/2JJ

P215/55R17 93V 220 (2.2, 32) 260 (2.6, 38) 17 � 7JJ

When driving under the above vehicle load conditions at sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in countrieswhere such speeds are permitted by−law, inflate the front and rear tires to 280 kPa (2.8 kgf/cm2 or bar, 41 psi) providedthat it does not exceed the maximum cold tire pressure molded on the tire sidewall.Spare

kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Tire size Tire inflation pressure Wheel size

P215/60R16 94V 200 (2.0, 29) 16 � 6 1/2JJ

P215/55R17 93V 220 (2.2, 32) 17 � 7JJ

T155/70R17 110M 420 (4.2, 60) 17 � 4T

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):103 (10.5, 76)

NOTE: For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on pages 361 through 369 in Section 7−2.

Tires


387

Engine compartment

Instrument panel

Fuses (type A)

1. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

2. STOP NO.2 7.5 A: Stop lights, highmounted stoplight, vehicle stability con-trol system, anti−lock brake system

3. RADAR CC 7.5 A: Vehicle stabilitycontrol system

4. HEAD RH LWR 15 A: Right−handheadlight (low beam)

5. HEAD LH LWR 15 A: Left−hand head-light (low beam)

6. INJ 15 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

7. STOP NO.1 15 A: Multiplex commu-nication system

8. STR LOCK 25 A: Steering lock system

9. IMMOBI 7.5 A: Smart key system

10. AMP 30 A: Audio system

11. TURN/HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights

12. IG2 25 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

13. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

14. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system

15. DOOR NO.1 25 A: Multiplex commu-nication system

16. AM2 7.5 A: Starter system

17. RAD NO.1 15 A: Audio system, centerdisplay, navigation system

18. ECU−B 10 A: Center display, multiplexcommunication system

Fuses

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

388

19. DOME 7.5 A: Gauges and meters,clock, front personal lights, door cour-tesy lights, garage door opener, rearpersonal lights, trunk light

20. S−HORN 7.5 A: Horn

21. WASHER 20 A: Windshield washer

22. A/F 25 A: Air fuel ratio sensor

23. HEAD RH UPR 15 A: Right−handheadlight (high beam)

24. HEAD LH UPR 15 A: Left−hand head-light (high beam)

25. HORN 10 A: Horn

26. EFI NO.1 25 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, fuel pump

27. RR DOOR 25 A: Power window (forrear right passenger)

28. RL DOOR 25 A: Power window (forrear left passenger)

29. FR DOOR 25 A: Power window (frontpassenger), driving position memorysystem

30. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

31. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-tem

32. MPX−B 7.5 A: Multiplex communicationsystem

33. P/W 25 A: Power window, driving posi-tion memory system

34. FUEL OPN 7.5 A: Fuel filler dooropener

35. AM1 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, starting system, ignition sys-tem

36. A/C 7.5 A: Air conditioning system

37. DOOR NO.2 25 A: Multiplex commu-nication system

38. S/ROOF 30 A: Electric moon roof

39. TAIL 10 A: Parking lights, license platelights, tail lights, front and rear sidemarker lights

40. PANEL 7.5 A: Seat heaters, navigationsystem, emergency flasher, electroni-cally controlled automatic transmissionsystem, glove box light, instrumentpanel lights, power outlets

41. ECU IG NO.1 10 A: Center display,shift lock control system, electric moonroof, multiplex communication system

42. ECU IG NO.2 10 A: Anti−lock brakesystem, dynamic laser cruise controlsystem, automatic headlight levelingsystem, vehicle stability control system,multiplex communication system

43. HTR 7.5 A: Air conditioning system,instrument panel lights, electric coolingfan

44. A/C COMP 7.5 A: Air conditioning sys-tem

45. S−HTR 20 A: Air conditioning system

46. GAUGE NO.1 10 A: Back−up lights,navigation system, emergency flashers

47. WIP 30 A: Windshield wipers

48. RR S/SHADE 10 A: Rear electric sun-shade

49. IGN 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, SRS airbag system, front pas-senger occupant classification system,smart key system, starter system

50. GAUGE NO.2 7.5 A: Gauges and me-ters, center display

51. ECU−ACC 7.5 A: Power rear view mir-rors, center display, shift lock system,multiplex communication system

52. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter

53. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets

54. RADIO NO.2 7.5 A: Audio system,navigation system

55. MIR HTR 10 A: Outside rear view mir-ror defoggers


389

Fuses (type B)

56. ALT 120 A (vehicles without com-pass)/140 A (vehicles with compass):Charging system, “RR DEF”, “ABS/VSCNO.2” “HEATER”, “ABS/VSC NO.1”,“RDI FAN”, “WASHER” and “S−HORN”fuses

57. MAIN 40 A: Headlights

58. ST/AM2 30 A: Starter system

59. HEATER 50 A: Air conditioning system

60. ABS/VSC NO.1 50 A: Anti−lock brakesystem, vehicle stability control system

61. RDI FAN 50 A: Electric cooling fan

62. ABS/VSC NO.2 30 A: Anti−lock brakesystem, vehicle stability control system

63. RR DEF 50 A: Rear windshield defog-ger, outside rear view mirror defoggers

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

390


391

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.OWNERSReporting safety defects for u.s. ownersReporting safety defects for U.S. owners 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9

’06 AVALON_U (L/O 0508)

392

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,Inc. (Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may either callthe Auto Safety Hotline toll−free at1−888−327−4236 (or 366−0123 in Wash-ington, DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.Department of Transportation, Washington,DC 20590. You can also obtain other in-formation about motor vehicle safety fromthe Hotline.

Reporting safety defects forU.S. owners

Foreword - s3. · PDF fileWhen it comes to service, ... Gas station information Fuel type:...

Documents

Transcript of Foreword - s3. · PDF fileWhen it comes to service, ... Gas station information Fuel type:...